Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 4/ 6
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and il lustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C
Copyright 2011 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 4/ 6
Black plate (3,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru of America, Inc. and sold at retail
by an authorized SUBARU dealer in the
United States come with the following
warranties.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control Systems Warranty
. Emissions Performance Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenan ce Bookl et”.
Please read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
All SUBARU vehicles distributed by
Subaru Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by
an authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties.
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Anti-Corrosion Warranty
. Emission Control Warranty
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclu sions, is in the
“Warranty and Service Booklet”. Please
read these warranties carefully.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is equipped with a
navigation system and/or Rear
Seat Entertainment System, the
displays contain mercury. There-
fore, the displays of the naviga-
tion system and/or Rear Seat
Entertainment System must be
removed before vehicle disposal.
Once the displays have been
removed, please reuse, recycle
or dispose of them as hazardous
waste.
. If your vehicle is equipped with
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlights, the HID headlights
contain mercury. Therefore, it is
necessary to remove HID head-
lights before vehicle di sposal.
Once removed, please reuse, re-
cycle or dispose of the HID head-
lights as hazardous waste.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed o f fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
1
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem while driving, such as a
flat tire or engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU running
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about the dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Tire
information, Uniform tire quality grading
standards and Reporting safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “ Do
not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Abbreviation list
You will find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
A/ELR
Automatic/Emergency locking
retractor
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
AT Automatic transmission
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
AWD All-wheel drive
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
HID High intensity discharge
INT Intermittent
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
Abbreviation Meaning
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
OBD On-board diagnostics
RON Research octane number
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
VDC
Vehicle dynamics control
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F22.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Passengers’ windows lock
Fuel
Front fog lights
Parking lights
Hazard warning flasher
Seat heater
3
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4
Mark Name
Child restraint lower an-
chorages
Child restraint top tether an-
chorages
Horn
Windshield wiper deicer
Wiper intermittent
Windshield wiper and washer
Windshield wiper mist (for
single wipe)
Rear window wiper
Rear window washer
Lights
Headlight beam leveler
Mark Name
Parking lights, tail lights, li-
cense plate lights and instru-
ment panel illumination
Headlights
Turn signal
Illumination brightness
Engine hood
Fan speed
Instrument panel outlets
Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
Foot outlets
Windshield defroster and foot
outlets
Windshield defroster
Mark Name
Rear window defogger/Out-
side mirror defogger
Air recirculation
Outside air
Engine oil
Washer
Door lock (transmitter)
Door unlock (transmitter)
Rear gate (transmitter)
Power folding mirror
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accide nt, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint
System) airbag does not do away
with the need to fasten seatbelts.
In combination with the seat-
belts, it offers the best combined
protection in case of a serious
accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-17.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Suppl emental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-45.
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, in-
fants and small children should
always be placed in one of the
rear seating positions recom-
mended in this Owner ’s Manual
in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in a REAR seat and be
restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
a REAR seat properly restrained
5
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6
at all times in a child restraint
device or in a seatbelt. The SRS
airbag deploys with considerable
speed and force and can injure or
even kill children, especially if
they are 12 years of age and
under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because
children are lighter and weaker
than adults, their risk of being
injured from deployment is great-
er.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN
THE FRONT SEAT. DOING SO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR
DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-
CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOO
CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always use the child safety locks
whenever a chi ld ride s in the
rear. Serious injury could result
if a child accidentally opened the
door and fell out. Refer to “Child
safety locks” F2-21.
. Always lock the passenger’s win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Power windows” F2-21.
. Never leave unattended children
in the vehicle. They could acci-
dentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, temperature
in a closed vehicle could quickly
become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries
to them.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-17.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-29.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Suppl emental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-45.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxide, a colorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoi d remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction and
impairs your perception, judgment
and attentiveness. If you drive after
drinking - even if you drink just a
little - it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken dr iving is one o f the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-
hol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction will be delayed and your
perception, judgment and attentive-
ness will be impaired. If you drive
when tire d or sleepy, yo ur, your
passengers’ and other persons’
chances of being involved in a
serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
7
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and p ark in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durabi lity,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Driving a vehicle equipped
with a navigation system
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while dri ving.
The loss of attention to driving
could lead to an accident. If you
wish to operate the controls of the
navigation system, first take the
vehicle off the road and stop it in a
safe place.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collisi on or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protectio n society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become ho t. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Check a nd, if necessary, adjust th e
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain o r emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& On-road and off-road driving
This vehicle is classified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. Your vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and higher center of gravity,
making it more likely to roll over than
ordinary passenger cars. It also handles
and maneu vers di fferently f rom o ther
passenger cars. For this reason, please
read carefully the following section and
follow the instructions and precautions in
order to prevent serious injury or death
due to loss of control, rollover and other
accidents. Refer to “On-road and off-road
driving” F8-6.
9
0
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
北米Model "A3170BE-A" Edited: 2011/ 4/ 6
Black plate (14,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
12
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood lock release (page 11-4)
2) Headlight switch (page 3-28)
3) Bulb replacement (page 11-36)
4) Wiper switch (page 3-34)
5) Moonroof (page 2-25)
6) Roof rail (if equipped) (page 8-14)
7) Door locks (page 2-5)
8) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
9) Flat tires (page 9-6)
10) Tire chains (page 8-11)
11) Fog light switch (page 3-32)
12) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)
13) Towing hook (page 9-14)
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1) Rear gate (page 2-24)
2) Rear wiper switch (page 3-35)
3) Rear window defogger button
(page 3-37)
4) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 7-3)
5) Child safety locks (page 2-21)
6) Tie-down hooks (page 9-15)
7) Bulb replacement (page 11-36)
8) Towing hook (page 9-14)
13
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1) Cargo area light (page 6-3)
2) Dome lights (page 6-2)
3) Second-row center seatbelt (page 1-22)
4) Sun visors (page 6-4)
5) Map light (page 6-3)
6) Top tether anchorages (second-row seat)
(page 1-40)
7) Top tether anchorages (third-row seat)
(page 1-40)
15
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Instrument panel
1) Door locks (page 2-5)
2) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-29)
3) Remote control mirror switch
(page 3-42)
Power folding mirror switch (if equipped)
(page 3-43)
4) Windshield wiper deicer (page 3-36)
5) Traction Control system OFF switch
(page 7-25)
6) Headligh t be am leveler (i f equipped)
(page 3-30)
7) Light control switch (page 3-27)
8) Combination meter (page 3-5)
9) Wiper control lever (page 3-33)
10) Cruise control (page 7-29)
11) Horn (page 3-44)
12) SRS airbag (page 1-45)
13) Tilt steering (page 3-44)
14) Hood lock release knob (page 11-4)
15) Fuse box (page 11-34)
16) Power windows (page 2-21)
17
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (20,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
18
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1) Parking light switch (page 3-32)
2) Windshield wiper (page 3-33)
3) Mist (page 3-34)
4) Windshield washer (page 3-35)
5) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-35)
6) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-34)
7) Wiper control lever (page 3-34)
8) Light control switch (page 3-27)
9) Fog light switch (page 3-32)
10) Headlight ON/OFF (page 3-28)
11) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-28)
12) Turn signal (page 3-29)
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Combination meter
! U.S.-spec. models
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Speedometer (page 3-6)
4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
5) Trip meter and odometer
(page 3-6/page 3-7)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
7) Se lect lever/Gear position indicator
(page 3-21)
19
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
20
! Canada-spec. models
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Speedometer (page 3-6)
4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
5) Trip meter and odometer
(page 3-6/page 3-7)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
7) Se lect lever/Gear position indicator
(page 3-21)
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Other models
1) Temperature gauge (page 3-8)
2) Tachometer (page 3-7)
3) Speedometer (page 3-6)
4) Fuel gauge (page 3-8)
5) Trip meter and odometer
(page 3-6/page 3-7)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-7)
7) Se lect lever/Gear position indicator
(page 3-21)
21
– CONTINUED –
0
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
22
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark Name Page
Driver’s seatbelt warning
light
3-10
Front passenger’s seat-
belt warning light
3-10
SRS airbag system
warning light
3-11
CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction indi-
cator light
3-12
Charge warning light 3-13
Oil pressure warning light 3-13
AT OIL TEMP warning
light
3-13
/ ABS warning light 3-15
/
Brake system warning
light
3-16
Door open warning light
3-17
Mark Name Page
Low fuel warning light 3-17
AWD warning light 3-18
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light (U.S.-
spec. models and
Canada-spec. models)/
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
light (all models)
3-18
Traction Control system
OFF indicator light (U.S.-
spec. models and
Canada-spec. models)
3-19
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol warning light (Latin
America-spec. models)/
Traction Control system
OFF indicator light (Latin
America-spec. models)
3-19
Security indicator light 3-21
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-21
High beam indicator light 3-22
Front fog light indicator
light
3-22
Mark Name Page
Headlight indicator light 3-22
Cruise control indicator
light
3-22
Cruise control set indica-
tor light
3-22
Low tire pressure warn-
ing light
3-14
Passenger airbag ON in-
dicator light
3-12
Passenger airbag OFF
indicator light
3-12
SPORT mode indicator
light
3-21
Windshield washer fluid
warning light
3-17
Rear differential oil tem-
perature warning light
3-13
Black plate (26,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
24
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with the genuine SUBARU navigation system, the settings for some
of these functions can be changed using the navigation monitor. For details, please refer to the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
navigation system.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting Page
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-16
Monitoring start delay time (after closure of doors) 0 second/30 seconds 30 seconds 2-17
Impact sensor operation (only models with shock
sensors (dealer option))
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-20
Passive arming Operation/Non-operation Non-operation 2-19
Dome light/map lights illumination ON/OFF OFF 2-16
Remote keyless entry sys-
tem
Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-8
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-11
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-7
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
Horn chirp confirmation ON/OFF ON 7-10
Rear window defogger Rear window defogger Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes 3-37
Windshield wiper deicer Windshield wiper deicer Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes 3-36
Map lights/Dome light Operation of map lights/dome light OFF delay
timer
OFF/Short/Normal/Long Normal 6-2/6-3
Map lights Illumination in conjunction with a door open Operation/Non-operation Operation
(Illumination - ON)
6-3
Battery drainage prevention
function
Battery drainage prevention function Operation/Non-operation Operation 2-6
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Power seat.......................................................... 1-3
Memory function (driver’s seat – if equipped)....... 1-4
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5
Active head restraint ........................................... 1-6
Lumbar support .................................................. 1-7
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-7
Second-row seats ............................................... 1-8
Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-8
Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-9
Folding down the seatback ................................. 1-10
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-12
Armrest ............................................................. 1-13
Third-row seat .................................................... 1-13
Access to the third-row seat ............................... 1-14
Folding down the seatback ................................. 1-15
Head restraint adjustment................................... 1-16
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-17
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-17
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-18
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor
(A/ELR) ............................................................ 1-18
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-18
Fastening the seatbelt........................................ 1-18
Seatbelt maintenance......................................... 1-26
Front seatbelt pretensioners............................. 1-27
System monitors ............................................... 1-28
System servicing ............................................... 1-28
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-28
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-29
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-30
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-32
Installing child restraint systems with A/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-32
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-36
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-37
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-40
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-45
Your vehicle’s SRS configuration ....................... 1-45
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-49
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-60
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-71
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-72
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-72
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Black plate (30,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-2 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure luggage and the hands and
feet of second-row seat passen-
gers are clear of the adjusting
mechanism.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags dep loy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in a
rear seat properly restrained at all
times. The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force and
can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of
age and under and are not re-
strained or improperly restrained.
Because children are lighter and
weaker than adults, their risk of
being injured from deployment is
greater. Consequently, we strongly
recommend that ALL children (in-
cluding those in child seats and
those that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in a REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in a
child restraint device or in a seat-
belt, whichever is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and weight.
Always secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including forward
facing child seats) in one of the rear
seating positions recommended in
this Owner’s Manual.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
Black plate (31,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-29.
& Power seat
! Forward and backward adjustment
To adjust the seat forward or backward,
move the control switch forward or back-
ward.
NOTE
During backward-forward adjustment
of the seat, you cannot adjust the seat
cushion angle or seat height.
! Reclining the seatback
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
To adjust the angle of the seatback, move
the control switch.
! Seat cushion angle adjustment
(driver’s seat)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-3
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (32,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-4 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up
or push down the front end of the control
switch.
! Seat height adjustment (driver’s
seat)
To adjust the seat height, pull up or push
down the rear end of the control switch.
& Memory function (driver’s
seat – if equipped)
Two of your favorite seat positions can be
registered. Register the seat position with
button “1” or “2” and retrieve the seat
position by pressing either button.
The foll owing seat positions can be
registered.
. Forward/backward position of the seat
. Angle of seatback
. Angle of seat cushion
. Height of seat
! Registration of seat position
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure luggage and the hands and
feet of second-row seat passen-
gers are clear of the adjusting
mechanism.
1. With the select lever in the “P” posi-
tion, adjust the seat position.
2. While pressing the “SET” button, press
the desired button “1” or “2”.
3. The chime sounds once, and the seat
position is registered.
! Retrieval of seat position
WARNING
. Never retrieve the seat position
while driving to avoid loss of
vehicle control and personal in-
jury.
. Perform the seat position retrie-
val before driving. Be sure to
confirm that the select lever
position is in the “P” position.
Do not drive until the retrieval of
the seat position is complete.
Black plate (33,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. Be sure to press t he correct
button to retrieve your registered
seat position. If the seat position
is not optimum for you, it may
adversely affect your driving and
may reduce the effectiveness of
the seatbelt. That could result in
an accident involving serious
injury or death.
. When retrieving a registered seat
position, make sure the hands,
feet and possessions of second-
row seat passengers are clear of
the seat adjusting mechanism.
. When any trouble or a malfunc-
tion occurs during the retrieval of
the seat position, stop the retrie-
val of the seat position using any
of the control switches for man-
ual adjustment, seat memory set
button, seat memory registered
button 1 or 2.
1. With the select lever in the “P” posi-
tion, press the desired button “1” or “2”.
2. The chime sounds once and the seat
moves to the registered position.
3. When the seat moves to the registered
position, the chime sounds twice.
NOTE
. If a new position is registered for the
same button, the previous seat posi-
tion is deleted.
. Even if the battery is disconnected,
the registered seat position is not
deleted.
& Head restraint adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Both the driver ’s seat and the f ront
passenger’s seat are equipped with head
restraints.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-5
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (34,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-6 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head r estraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
& Active head restraint
The f ront se ats o f you r vehi cle a re
equipped with active head restraints. They
automatically tilt forward slightly in the
event the vehicle is struck from the rear,
decreasing the amount of rearward head
movement and thus reducing the risk of
whiplash. For maximum effectiveness the
head restraint should be adjusted so that
the center of the head restraint is closest
to the top of the occupant’s ears.
CAUTION
. Each active head restraint is
effective only when its height is
properly adjusted and the driver/
passenger sits in the correct
position on the seat.
. If your vehicle is involved in a
rear-end collision, have an
authorized SUBARU dealer in-
spect the active head restraints.
. The active head restraints may
not operate in the event the
vehicle experiences only a slight
impact in the rear.
. The active head restraints may be
damaged if they are pushed hard
from behind or subjected to
shock. As a result, they may not
function if the vehicle suffers a
rear impact.
Black plate (35,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Lumbar support
Pull the lever forward or backward.
Pulling the lever forward will increase the
amount of support for your lower back.
Pulling the lever backward will decrease
the amount of support for your lower back.
Seat heater (if equipped)
The seat heater is equipped in the front
seats.
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is in the “ON” position.
The seat heater can be adjusted in three
levels. Press the button to activate the
seat heater. Each subsequent press of the
button will reduce the level. Pushing the
button four times or keeping the button
pressed for approximately 1 second will
turn the heater off. While the seat heater is
operating, its operating level is shown by
the number of illuminated indicators. To
warm the seat as quickly as possible, set
the heater with three indicators illumi-
nated.
When the vehicle’s interior is warmed
enough or before you leave the vehicle,
always turn the switch off.
CAUTION
. There is a possibility that people
with delicate skin may suffer
slight burns even at low tempera-
tures if they use the seat heater
for a long period of time. When
using the heater, always be sure
to warn the persons concerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-7
1
Black plate (36,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-8 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Second-row seats
WARNING
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious i nternal injury or
death.
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing. Doing so is dangerous as the
seat could move rapidly and you
could be injured.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of the
third-row seat passe ngers are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is se-
curely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the
second-row seats. They may in-
terfere with the seat locking and
cause an unexpected accident.
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Forward and backward ad-
justment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position.
Black plate (37,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
When the right seat or the left seat pair is
slid rearward, it stops partway at the lock
point so as not to trap the legs of
passengers sitting on the third-row seat.
It is possible to slide the seat or seat pair
further rearward by releasing the lock that
stops it. To do this, simultaneously pull the
lever under the outboard seat cushion and
turn the lever on the side of the seat
cushion outward when sliding the seat or
seat pair.
Once you have released the lock, you can
slide the seat or seat pair back and forth
with only the lever under the seat cushion
pulled. If you slide the seat or seat pair
forward of the lock point, you will need to
release the lock again before you can
slide it behind the point.
Then release the lever and move the seat
back and forth to make sure that it is
securely locked into place.
CAUTION
If you slide the seat or seat pair aft
of the lock point while the third-row
seat is occupied, be careful not to
trap the legs of the third-row pas-
sengers.
& Reclining the seatback
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects s uch as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
CAUTION
. Never allow the third-row seat
passengers to adjust the seat-
back of the second row. Doing so
is dangerous as the seatback will
tilt rapidly and could injure the
passengers.
. If the cargo area cover is
equipped, be careful not to pinch
your hand between the headrest
and the cargo area cover when
you recline the seatback.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-9
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (38,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-10 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback
to the desired position.
Then release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
& Folding down the seatback
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded seatback or in the
cargo area. Doing so may result
in serious injury or death.
. Secure skis and other long items
properly to prevent them from
being thrown around inside the
vehicle and causing serious in-
jury during a sudden stop, a
sudden steering maneuver or a
rapid acceleration.
. If passengers are sitting on the
third-row seat, never drive while
folding the second-row seat. It
can be a serious interference at
the time of braking and impact.
. If passengers are sitting on the
third-row seat, never drive while
the center seatback of the sec-
ond-row seat is folded. Doing so
may result in serious injury in the
event of hard braking or an
impact.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may s ud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the seatback to its
original position, be sure to place
all of the seatbelts and the tab
attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
1. Sli de the seat or seat pair to it s
rearmost position.
2. Lower the head restraint to its lowest
position. Refer to “Head restraint adjust-
ment” F1-12.
3. Unlock the seatback by pulling the
lever and then fold the seatback down.
4. To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place. Make sure it is securely locked.
Black plate (39,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
By pulling the tab on the center seat, you
can fold only the seatback of the center
seat.
To return the seatba ck to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place. Make sure it is securely locked.
1) Bar
CAUTION
. Folding the seatback of the cen-
ter seat will expose the bar that
retains it in the raised position.
Be careful not to hurt yourself on
it. Especially, do not rest your
finger on the b ar. Otherwise,
when the seatback is raised, your
finger could be pinched between
the bar and seatback and thus
injured.
. Raise the seatback of the center
seat while taking care not to trap
your hands or other parts of the
body between the center seat
and window-side seat.
NOTE
1) Holder
With the seatback folded, attach the
tongue plate of each rear/second-row
seatbelt to the corresponding holder.
Do the same also before someone gets
into the third-row seat.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-11
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (40,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-12 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the second-row window side seats
and t he se cond-row center seat are
equipped with head restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you remove the head restraints,
you must reinstall all head re-
straints to protect vehicle occu-
pants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
! Window side seats
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks.
! Center seat
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to an appropriate
position depending on your sitting
height.
A) When not used (retracted position)
B) When used (extended position)
Black plate (41,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head r estraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
The head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
When the center seat is not occupied,
lower the head restraint to improve rear-
ward visibility.
& Armrest
To lower the armrest, pull on the strap of
the armrest.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest while the vehicle is in
motion.
Third-row seat
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-13
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (42,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-14 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Access to the third-row seat
There are levers on both sides of the
second-row seat. Each lever is used to
facilitate access to the third-row seat.
WARNING
In its slid-forward position with the
seatback tipped forward, the sec-
ond-row seat is not locked and free
to move. Do not drive the vehicle
with the seat in this state or allow
anyone to sit on the seat unless it is
completely locked. Doing so may
result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION
When getting into or out of the third-
row seat, make sure the second-row
seat is in the completely slid-for-
ward position and be sure to watch
your step.
! To access the third-row seat
Raise the lever. The seatback of the
second-row seat will tip forward and the
seat will slide forward.
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/
aft position of the second-row seat, raise
the seatback, and make sure the seatback
is securely locked in position.
! To get out from the third-row seat
Raise the lever from the third-row seat.
The seatback of the second-row seat will
tip forward and the seat will slide forward.
Before driving the vehicle, adjust the fore/
aft position of the second-row seat, raise
the seatback, and make sure the seatback
is securely locked in position.
Black plate (43,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Folding down the seatback
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded seatback or in the
cargo area. Doing so may result
in serious injury or death.
. Secure skis and other long items
properly to prevent them from
being thrown around inside the
vehicle and causing serious in-
jury during a sudden stop, a
sudden steering maneuver or a
rapid acceleration.
. When you return the seatback to
its original position, shake the
seatback slightly to confirm that
it is securely fixed in place. If the
seatback is not securely fixed in
place, the seatback may sud-
denly fold down in the event of
sudden braking, or objects may
move out from the cargo area,
which could cause serious injury
or death.
. After returning the seatback to its
original position, be sure to place
all of the seatbelts and the tab
attached to the seat cushion
above the seat cushion. Also,
make certain that the shoulder
belts are fully visible.
1) Lowering strap
2) Folding lever
1. Pull the lowering strap to lower the
head restraint.
2. Pull up the folding lever to release the
seatback lock, and fold down the seat-
back. Refer to “Head restraint adjustment”
F1-16.
To return the seatback to its original
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place. Make sure it is securely locked.
NOTE
1) Holder
. Before folding or raising the seat-
back of the third-row seat, confirm that
the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall
at the lower point and the webbing is
attached to the holder.
. When raising the seatback of the
third-row seat, if the seatbelt catches
on the seatback, hold the belt forward
of the seatback while latching the
seatback.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-15
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (44,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-16 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the third-row seats are equipped with
head restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints lowered when the
seats are occupied because they
are designed to reduce the risk of
serious neck injury in the event
that the vehicle is struck from the
rear.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
1) When not used (retracted position)
2) When used (raised position)
1) Head restraint
2) Lowering strap
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Pull the lowering strap.
When the seats are not occupied, lower
the head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
CAUTION
. The head restraint is not intended
to be used at the lower position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise
the head restraint.
. After returning the head re-
straints to the raised position,
shake the head restraint slightly
to confirm that it is securely fixed
in place.
. When you lower the head re-
straints, confirm that there are
no passengers or objects on the
third-row seat.
Black plate (45,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFO RE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. Each seatbelt is designed t o
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, serious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Put children aged 12 and under in
a rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS air bag de -
ploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. Conse-
quently, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (incl uding
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in a REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Always secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in one of
the rear seating positions recom-
mended in this Owner’s Manual.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-29.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the
driver and front passenger when any of
the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags
deploy.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-29.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-17
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (46,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-18 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the face or neck, adjust the shoulder belt
anchor height (window-side seating posi-
tions only) and then if necessary move the
child closer to the belt buckle to help
provide a good shoulder belt fit. Care must
be taken to securely place the lap belt as
low as possible on the hips and not on the
child’s waist. If the shoulder portion of the
belt cannot be properly positioned, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (A/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/
ELR). The Automatic/Emergency Locking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The A/
ELR has an addi tional locking mode,
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode”, intended to secure a child restraint
system.
The ALR mode functions as follows.
When the seatbelt is once drawn out
completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is canceled
and the ELR mode is restored.
When securing a child restraint system on
the rear passenger’s seats by using a
seatbelt, the seatbelt must be changed
over to the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode. For instructions on how to
install the child restraint system using a
seatbelt, refer to “Installing child restraint
systems with A/ELR seatbelt” F1-32.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the retractor is
restored to the Emergency Locking Re-
tractor (ELR) mode by allowing the seat-
belt to retract fully.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
chime” F3-10.
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
Black plate (47,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
instead of across the weaker
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious i nternal injury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seatback as far
from the steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it a
strong pull, then pull it out slowly again.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-19
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (48,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-20 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the release button and slide the
anchor down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
Black plate (49,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Second-row seatbelts – excluding
center seatbelt
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the shoulder belt anchor
height (second-row seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
passenger. Always adjust the anchor
height so that the shoulder belt passes
over the middle of the shoulder without
touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Push the release button and slide the
anchor down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-21
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (50,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-22 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of th e
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
NOTE
1) Holder
With the seatback folded, attach the
tongue plate of each rear/second-row
seatbelt to the corresponding holder.
Do the same also before someone gets
into the third-row seat.
! Second-row center seatbelt
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
Black plate (51,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the connec-
tor’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
WARNING
Be sure to fasten both tongue plates
to the respective buckles. If the
seatbelt is used only as a shoulder
belt (with the connector’s tongue
plate not fastened to the connec-
tor’s buckle on the right-hand side),
it cannot properly restrain the wear-
er in position in an accident, possi-
bly resulting in serious injury or
death.
Center seatbelt is stowed in the recess of
the ceiling.
1. Remove the connector (tongue) plate
from the slot located at the front of the
recess by pulling the connector (tongue)
plate rearward.
2. Pull out the seatbelt slowly from the
overhead retractor.
3. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-23
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (52,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-24 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
is heard. Make sure that the “ ” mark on
the connector (tongue) and the “
” mark
on the buckle are aligned.
If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull it
out more slowly. If the belt still cannot be
unlocked, let the belt retract slightly after
giving it a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
in the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt. And place the lap belt as
low as possible on your hips, not on your
waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
1. Insert a key or other hard pointed
object into the slot in the connector
(buckle) on the right-hand side and push
Black plate (53,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
it in, and the connector (tongue) plate will
disconnect from the buckle.
2. With the belt held by hand, allow the
retractor to roll up the belt slowly. You
should hold the webbing end and guide it
back into the retractor while it is rolling up.
Neatly store the tongue plate in the recess
on the ceiling and then insert the con-
nector (tongue) plate into the slot located
at the front of the recess.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the to ngue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
! Third-row seatbelt
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted. If
the belt stops before reaching the buckle,
return the belt slightly and pull it out more
slowly. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving a
strong pull on it, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-25
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (54,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-26 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
Push the button on the buckle.
NOTE
1) Holder
. Before folding or raising the seat-
back of the third-row seat, confirm that
the seatbelt is flat against the sidewall
at the lower point and the webbing is
attached to the holder.
. When raising the seatback of the
third-row seat, if the seatbelt catches
on the seatback, hold the belt forward
of the seatback while latching the
seatback.
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks, cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
Black plate (55,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners for the driver’s seat
and front passenger’s seat operate at the
same time as the frontal, and side SRS
airbags. If the vehicle rolls over, they
operate simultaneously with the curtain
airbag.
The front and side airbag sensors and the
rollover sensor are used as the preten-
sioner sensors. If a sensor detects a
certain predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, a side impact
collision or a rollover collision of the
vehicle, the front seatbelt is quickly drawn
back in by the retractor to take up the
slack so that the belt more effectively
restrains the front seat occupant.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor frontal
impacts, in minor side impacts or rear
impacts.
. The seatbelt pretensioners for the
driver’s seat and front pas senger’s
seat operate at the same time as the
frontal, and side SRS airbags. If the
vehicle rolls over, they operate simul-
taneously with the curtain airbag.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies must be
replaced and only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front s eatbelt d oes not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting him
to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
occupants should sit in an up-
right position with their seatbelts
properly fastened. Refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-17.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-27
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (56,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-28 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, see your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
module with the airbag system. Therefore,
if any malfunction occurs in a seatbelt
pretensioner, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. For details,
refer to “SRS airbag system monitors” F1-
71.
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in accidental activation of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or air-
bag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury. Do not use elec-
trical test equipment on any
circuit rel ated to the seatbelt
pretensioner and airbag sys-
tems. For required servicing of
the seatbelt pretensioner, see
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
The front sub sensors are located
on both sides of the radiator panel,
and the airbag control module in-
cluding the impact sensors is lo-
cated under the center console. If
you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front seatbelt
retractors, we recommend that you
have an authorized SUBARU dealer
perform the work.
NOTE
If the front part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modification s
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attach ment of any equipme nt
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the door
pillar or specified for individual
Black plate (57,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
vehicle models in this Owner’s
Manual.
Child restraint systems
While riding in the vehicle, infants and
small children should always be placed in
an infant or child restraint system in one of
the rear seating positions recommended
in this Owner’s Manual.
You should use an infant or child restraint
system that meets Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards, is compatible with
your vehicle and is appropriate for the
child’s age and size.
All child restraint systems are designed to
be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-37).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-29
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (58,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-30 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot pro-
tect the child from injury in a colli-
sion, because the child will be
caught between the passenger and
objects inside the vehicle. Addition-
ally, holding a child in your lap or
arms in the front seat exposes that
child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children s hould b e properl y re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Second-row outboard seats
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, Automatic/Emergency
Locking Retractor (A/ELR) seatbelts and
lower anchorages (bars) are provided for
installing a child restraint system.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
Black plate (59,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Second-row center seat
Installing a child restraint system is not
recommended, although the A/ELR seat-
belt and an upper anchorage (tether
anchorage) are provided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
D: Third-row seat
Installing a child restraint system is not
recommended, although the A/ELR seat-
belt and two upper anchorages (tether
anchorages) are provided in these posi-
tions.
These seating positions are not equipped
with lower anchorages (bars) for installing
LATCH system-type child restraints. How-
ever, child restraint devices can be used in
these position using the A/ELR seatbelts
and upper anchorages (tether an-
chorages) provided.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
WARNING
Put children aged 12 and under in
the rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill children,
especially if they are 12 years of age
and under and are not restrained or
improperly restrained. Because chil-
dren are lighter and weaker than
adults, their risk of being injured
from deployment is greater.
Consequently, be sure to secure
ALL types of child restraint devices
(including forward facing child
seats) in the REAR seats at all times.
You should choose a restraint de-
vice which is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Ac-
cording to accident statistics, chil-
dren are safer when properly re-
strained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’S
SRS AIRBAG, DO NOT INSTALL A
REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S H EAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-31
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (60,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-32 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protecti on. The child
restraint system should meet all applic-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards for United States or
Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
for Canada. It can be identified by looking
for the label on the child restraint system
or the manufacturer’s statement of com-
pliance in the document attached to the
system. Also it is important for you to
make sure that the child restraint system
is compatible with the vehicle in which it
will be used.
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with A/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Sli de the seat or seat pair to it s
rearmost position.
2. Adjust the seatback to the upright
position.
3. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Black plate (61,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode. Then, allow the belt to rewind into
the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
8. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured.
Sometimes a child restraint can be more
firmly secured by pushing it down into the
seat cushion and then tightening the
seatbelt.
9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
10. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-33
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (62,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-34 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR mode of the retractor. That mode
is restored by retracting the seatbelt
fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
Second-row outboard seat
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Second-row center seat
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Third-row seat
1) Head restraint
2) Lowering strap
1. When installing on the second-row
outboard seat, remove the head restraint.
When installing on the second-row cen-
ter seat, raise the head restraint. When
installing on the third-row seat, lower the
head restraint.
2. Sli de the seat or seat pair to it s
rearmost position.
3. Adjust the seatback to the upright
position.
4. Place the child restraint system in the
seating position.
5. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
6. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
Black plate (63,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
8. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
9. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child restraint can
be more firmly secured by pushing it down
into the seat cushion and then tightening
the seatbelt.
10. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
Second-row seat
Third-row seat
11. If the child restraint system requires a
top tether, latch the hook onto the top
tether anchor and tighten the top tether.
For additional instructions, refer to “To p
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-35
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (64,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-36 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
tether anchorages” F1-40.
12. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Sli de the seat or seat pair to it s
rearmost position.
2. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
3. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
Black plate (65,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to e nsure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed in a rear seating position of
your vehicle without use of the seatbelts.
Such child restraint systems are secured
to the dedicated anchorages provided on
the vehicle body.
The lower and tether anchorages are
sometimes referred to as the LATCH
system (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren).
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-37
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (66,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-38 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
The second-row seat has four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the window-side seating positions. For
each window-side seating position, two
lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided for all the seating
positions of the second-row seat.
On each outboard second-row seat, you
will find marks “
” at the bottom of the
seatback.
Black plate (67,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Slide the seat or seat pair to its
rearmost position.
2. Make the clearance between the seat
cushion and seatback a little wider to
locate the two anchorages (bars) for the
position where you want to install the child
restraint system.
3. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the seatback. When the
hooks are connec ted, make sure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
4. If your child restraint system i s a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages),
while pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
5. Connect the top tether hook to the
tether anchorage and firmly tighten the
tether. For information on how to set the
top tether, refer to “Top tether anchorages”
F1-40.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-39
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (68,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-40 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
6. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move seat back
and forth and left and right to verify that it
is held securely in position.
7. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with five top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in a rear seating position. When
installing a child restraint system using top
tether, proceed as follows, while observing
the instructions by the child restrai nt
system manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
! Tether anchorage location
! Second-row seat
Three tether anchorages, i.e., ones for the
right, center and left seats, are already
installed on the back of each seatback.
Open the cover flap to use each ancho-
rage.
! Third-row seat
Two tether anchorages are attached to the
rear edge of the cargo area.
Open the cover flap to use each ancho-
rage.
Black plate (69,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! To hook the top tether
! Second-row outboard seat
1. Remove the head restraint at the
window-side seating position where the
child restraint system has been installed
with the lower anchorages or seatbelt; lift
up the head restraint while pressing the
release button. Store the head restraint in
the cargo area. Avoid placing the head
restraint in the passenger compartment to
prevent it from being thrown around in the
passenger compartment in a sudden stop
or a sharp turn.
2. Confirm that there are no obstacles
around the anchorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
CAUTION
When the child restraint system is to
be secured using the top tether,
pass the top tether under the head
restraint between the head restraint
stay posts.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the top tether with
the head restraint raised to the
highest position. If the head re-
straint is in any of the lower posi-
tions, the top tether will touch the
head restraint and the resulting
slack will prevent its secure installa-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-41
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (70,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-42 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
CAUTION
Do not route the top tether over the
head restraint. It may happen that
the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
! Second-row center seat
1. Raise the head restraint to the highest
position at the seating position where the
child seat has been installed using the
seatbelt or lower anchorages; lift up the
head restraint while pressing the release
button.
2. Confirm that there are no obstacles
around the anchorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
Black plate (71,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
CAUTION
When the child restraint system is to
be secured using the top tether,
pass the top tether under the head
restraint between the head restraint
stay posts.
CAUTION
Be sure to install the top tether with
the head restraint raised to the
highest position. If the head re-
straint is in any of the lower posi-
tions, the top tether will touch the
head restraint and the resulting
slack will prevent its secure installa-
tion.
CAUTION
Do not route the top tether over the
head restraint. It may happen that
the top tether cannot be fastened
tightly.
! Third-row seat
1) Head restraint
2) Lowering strap
1. Pull the lowering strap to lower the
head restraint.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-43
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (72,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-44 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
2. Open the lid of the cargo area, then
remove the covers for the anchorages.
3. Fasten the top tether hook of the child
restraint system to the appropriate upper
anchorage.
4. Tighten the top tether securely.
CAUTION
Do not pass the top tether under the
head restraint. The top tether will
touch the head restraint and the
resulting slack will prevent its se-
cure installation.
CAUTION
Do not use the top tether with the
head restraint in a raised position,
otherwise the top tether cannot be
fastened tightly.
Black plate (73,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
CAUTION
Prevent the top tether from touching
cargo in the cargo area. The top
tether may become slack if the
cargo changes shape or moves.
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt(s) by the
driver and front passenger when any of
the SRS frontal, side and curtain airbags
deploy. The recorded information cannot
be transmitted to any central communica-
tions system or other external device.
& Your vehicle’s SRS config-
uration
The driver’s seat, the front passenger’s
seat, and the outboard seats of the rear/
second seating row of your vehicle are
each provided with, in addition to a lap/
shoulder belt, one or more airbags as
follows.
. Frontal airbag (one each for driver’s
seat and front passenger’s seat)
. Side airbag (one each for driver’s seat
and front passenger’s seat)
. Curtain airbag (one each for the out-
board sides of cabin, extending from
driver’s and front passenger’s seats to
second seating row)
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-27.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers in the
vehicle should always wear seat-
belts when the vehicle is moving.
The SRS airbag is designed only
as a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. It does not do away with the
need to fasten seatbelts. In com-
bination with the seatbelts, it
offers the best combined protec-
tion in case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-45
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (74,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-46 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-17.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can result when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-acci-
dent braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
. The SRS a irbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
. Put children aged 12 and under in
a rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag de -
ploys with considerable speed
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
12 years of age and under and
are not restrained or improperly
restrained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
Consequently, we strongly re-
commend that ALL children (in-
cluding those in child seats and
those that have outgrown child
restraint devices) sit in a REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s age,
height and weight.
Always secure ALL types of child
restraint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in one of
the rear seating positions recom-
mended in this Owner’s Manual.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
Black plate (75,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint
system, refer to “Child restraint
systems” F1-29.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Never allow a child to stand up,
or to kneel on the front passen-
ger’s seat, or never hold a child
on your lap or in your arms. The
SRS airbag deploys with consid-
erable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
him or her to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-47
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (76,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-48 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Components
1) Airbag control module (including impact
and rollover sensors)
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Front passenger’s seatbelt tension sen-
sor
19) Front passe nger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
20) Front passe nger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the sec-
ond-row center seat)
Black plate (77,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements i n the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag is stowed
in the center portion of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is stowed near the top of the dashboard
under an “SRS AIRBAG” mark.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags deploy and supplement the
seatbelts by reducing the impact on the
driver’s and front passenger’s head and
chest.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SAFETY SEAT IN THE
FRONTSEAT.DOINGSORISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S H EAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up, or to
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-49
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (78,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-50 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable speed and force. Occu-
pants who are out of proper position
when the SRS airbag deploys could
suffer very serious injuries. Be-
cause the SRS airbag needs enough
space for deployment, the driver
should always sit upright and well
back in the seat as far from the
steering wheel as practical while
still maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries that
can result when the SRS airbag
contacts an occupant not in proper
position such as one thrown toward
the front of the vehicle during pre-
accident braking.
WARNING
Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dashboard.
If the SRS frontal airbag deploys,
those objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be pro-
pelled inside the vehicle and cause
injury.
Black plate (79,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact, backward-forward adjustment
of the driver’s seat position and whether or
not he/she is wearing the seatbelt.
The backward-forward adjustment of the
driver’s seat position is monitored by the
driver’s seat position sensor under the
driver’s seat.
Whether or not the driver is wearing the
seatbelt is monitored by the seatbelt
buckle switch.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may cause the seatbelt buckle
switch and/or the seat position sensor to
malfunction, preventing the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system from func-
tioning correctly or causing the system to
fail.
. Do not place articles/metal objects or
install any accessory other than a genuine
SUBARU acces sory under the driver’s
seat. Do not allow the rear seat occupant
to kick the driver’s seat or push up its
bottom surface with his/her feet.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle or under the driver’s seat.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or the
driver’s seat position sensor have failed,
the SRS airbag system warning light will
illuminate. Although the driver ’sSRS
frontal airbag can deploy regardless of
the backward-forward adjustment of the
driver ’s seat position even when the
warning light illuminates, have the system
inspected by your SUBARU dealer im-
mediately if the SRS airbag system warn-
ing light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver ’s SRS side airbag, SRS
curtain airbag and seatbelt preten-
sioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The total load on the seat is monitored by
the occupant detection system’s weight
sensor located under the seat.
The system has another sensor that
monitors the tension of the front passen-
ger seatbelt. Using the total seat load and
seatbelt tension data from the sensors,
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should or should not be inflated.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system from
functioning correctly or cause the system
to fail.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-51
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (80,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-52 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
. Do not apply any strong impact to the
front passenger’s seat such as by kicking.
. Do not spill liquid on the front passen-
ger’s seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off
immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory (such as
an audio amplifier) other than a genuine
SUBARU accessory under the front pas-
senger’s seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrel-
la, etc.) under the front passenger’s seat.
. The front passenger’s seat must not be
used with the head restraint removed.
. Do not leave any article including a
child restraint system on the front passen-
ger’s seat or the seatbelt tongue and
buckle engaged when you leave your
vehicle.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt retractor.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle i nspected at your
SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag,
SRS curtain airbag and seatbelt pre-
tensioner are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located in the center
portion of the instrument panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors simultaneously remain illuminated or
off even after the system check period, the
system is malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
spection.
Black plate (81,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat.
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with a rearward
facing child restraint system and an infant
is restrained with it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a forward
facing child restraint system and a small
child is restrained with it. (See WARNING
that follows.)
. The seat is equipped with a booster
seat and a small child is in the booster
seat. (See WARNING that follows.)
. The seat is relieved of the occupant
load for a time exceeding the predeter-
mined monitoring time period.
. The seat is occupied by a child who
has outgrown a child restraint system
(See WARNING that follows.) or by a
small adult.
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in one of the rear
seating positions recommended in
this Owner’s Manual in a correct
manner. Also, it is strongly recom-
mended that any forward facing
child seat or booster seat be in-
stalled in one of the rear seating
positions recommended in this
Owner ’s Manual, and that even
children who have outgrown a child
restraint system be also seated in a
REAR seat. This is because children
sitting in the front passenger’s seat
may be killed or severely injured
should the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats
are the safest place for children.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by a child, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may increase
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
activating the front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbag even though that seat is
occupied by a child.
. Do not place any article on the seat
other than the child occupant and a child
restraint system.
. Do not place more than one child on
the seat.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear/second-row seat
occupant to place his/her hands or legs on
the front passenger’s seatback, or allow
him/her to pull the seatback.
! If the front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when
an infant or a small child is in a child
restraint system (including booster
seat)
Turn the ignition switch to the “ LOCK”
position if the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates and the
OFF indicator turns off even when an
infant or a small child is in a child restraint
system (including booster seat). Remove
the child restraint system from the seat. By
referring to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s recommendations as well as the
child restraint system installation proce-
dures in the “Child restraint systems” F1-
29 section in this chapter, correctly install
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-53
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (82,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-54 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
the child restraint system. Turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position and make sure
that the front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator turns off and the OFF
indicator illuminates.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to one of the rear seating positions
recommended in this Owner’s Manual and
immediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. If the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag is activated (the ON
indicator remains illuminated while
the OFF indicator turns off), take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in
the seatback pocket.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and im-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions is met regarding the front passen-
ger ’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When a heavy article is placed on the
seat.
When the front passenger’s seat is occu-
pied by an adult, observe the following
precautions. Failure to do so may lessen
the load on the front passenger’s seat,
deactivating the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag despite the fact that the seat
is occupied by an adult.
. Do not allow the second-row seat
occupant to lift the front passenger’s seat
cushion using his/her feet.
. Do not place any article under the front
passenger’s seat, or squeeze any article
from behind and under the seat. This may
lift the seat cushion.
. Do not squeeze any article between
the front passenger’s seat and side trim/
pillar, door or center console box. This
may lift the seat cushion.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator illuminates and the ON
indicator turns off even when the
front passenger’s seat is occupied
by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incor-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ LOCK”
position. Ask the front passenger to set
the seatback to the upright position, sit up
Black plate (83,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position. Turn the ignition
switch to the “ON” position. If the OFF
indicator remains illuminated while the ON
indicator remains off, take the following
actions.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
. Ensure that there are no articles,
books, shoes, or other objects trapped
under the seat, at the rear of the seat, or
on the side of the seat.
. Next, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position and wait 6 seconds to allow
the system to complete self-checking.
Following the system check, both indica-
tors turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON
indicator should illuminate while the OFF
indicator remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! Effect vehicle modifications made
for persons with disabilities may
have on SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system operation (U.S. only)
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, seatbelts, front bumper, front side
frame, instrument panel, combination me-
ter, steering wheel, steering column, tire,
suspension or floor panel can affect the
operation of the SUBARU advanced air-
bag system. If you have any questions,
you may contact the following SUBARU
distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Servco Subaru Inc., dba Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202, Honolulu,
HI 96819
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Drive, Route 1 Dededo,
Guam
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-55
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (84,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-56 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Operation
1) Driver’s side
2) Passenger’s side
The SRS airbag can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenge r ’ s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the total load on the front
passenger’s seat monitored by the front
passenger’s occupant detection system
weight sensor. For this reason, only the
driver’s SRS frontal airbag may deploy in
the event of a collision, but this does not
mean failure of the system.
If the front sub sensors located on both
sides of the radiator panel and the impact
sensors in the airbag control module
detect a predetermined amount of force
during a frontal collision, the control
module sends signals to the airbag
module(s) (only driver’s module or both
driver’s and front passenger’s modules)
instructing the module(s) to inflate the
SRS frontal airbag(s). The driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags use
dual stage inflators. The two inflators of
each airbag are triggered either sequen-
tially or simultaneously, depending on the
severity of impact, backward-forward ad-
justment of the driver’s seat position and
fastening/unfastening of the seatbelt in the
case of the driver’s SRS frontal airbag and
depending on the severity of impact and
the total load on the seat in the case of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed. The time required
from detecting impact to the deflation of
the SRS airbag after deployment is short-
er than the blink of an eye.
When only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag
deploys and both the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS
airbag would activate in a non-accident
situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag
will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision
and will not interfere with the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be releas ed. Thes e
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steering
wheel and dashboard with bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
Black plate (85,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed to deploy in the event of an
accident involving a moderate to severe
frontal collision. They are not designed to
deploy in most lesse r frontal i mpacts
because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone. Also, they
are not designed to deploy in most side or
rear impacts or in most rollover accidents
because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbags
would not help the occupant in those
situations. The driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags are designed to
function on a one-time-only basis.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Examples of accidents in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will most
likely deploy.
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which it is possible that the
driver’s/driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) will de-
ploy.
The only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-57
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (86,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-58 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
Black plate (87,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s
and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur.
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-59
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (88,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-60 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the driver’s/driver’s and
front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will basically not deploy.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are designed not to deploy
in most cases if the vehicle is struck from
the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its
side or roof, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
& SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact to the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
the cabin i s stored in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the second-row seat). An “SRS AIRBAG”
mark is located at the top of each center
pillar.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the vehicle deploy between the
occupant and the side window and sup-
plement the seatbelt by reducing the
impact to the occupant’s head.
Black plate (89,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
The SRS curtain airbag does not operate
for third-row seat occupants.
WARNING
The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed as only
a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt. They
do not do away with the need to
fasten seatbelts. It is also important
to wear your seatbelt to help avoid
injuries that can result when an
occupant is not seated in a proper
upright position.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbag is stored in both
front seat seatbacks next to the
door, and it provides protection
by deploying rapidly (faster than
the blink of an eye) in the event of
a side impact collision. However,
theforceofSRSsideairbag
deployment may cause injuries
if your head or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms and hands out of the win-
dow. The SRS curtain airbag on
each side of the cabin is stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point over the sec-
ond-row seat), and it provides
protection by deploying rapidly
(faster than the blink of an eye) in
the event of a side impact or a
rollover. However, the force of its
deployment may cause injuries if
your head is too close to it.
WARNING
Do not rest your arm on either front
door or its internal trim. It could be
injured in the event of SRS side
airbag deployment.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-61
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (90,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-62 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
WARNING
. Never allow a child to kneel on
the front passenger’s seat facing
the side window or wrap his/her
arms around the front seat seat-
back. In the event of an accident,
the force of the SRS side airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head
or arms or other parts of the
body are too close to the SRS
side airbag.
Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
aged 12 and under should be
placed in a rear seat anyway and
should be properly restrained at
all times.
. Never allow a child to kneel on
any passenger’s seat facing the
side window or put their head,
arms or hands out of the window.
In the event of an accident, the
force of the SRS curtain airbag
deployment could injure the child
seriously because his/her head is
close to the SRS curtain airbag.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of t he SRS side airbag
deployment, they could be pro-
pelled dangerously toward the
vehicle’s occupants and cause
injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
Black plate (91,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
A hands-free microphone o r
other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seat’s occupant.
! Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
side airbags and SRS curtain airbags
deploy independently of each other be-
cause each has its own impact sensor.
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dently of the driver’s and front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering
wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the left and
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-63
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (92,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-64 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
right center pillars and rear wheel houses.
Another impact sensor, which also senses
impact force, is located under the second-
row center seat. In addition, a rollover
sensor is located inside the airbag control
module.
If one of the center pillar impact sensors
and the impact sensor that is located
under the second-row center seat to-
gether sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side collision, the
control module causes both the SRS side
airbag and curtain airbag on the impacted
side to inflate regardless of whether the
rear wheel house impact sensor on the
same side senses an impact. At this time,
the driver’s and front passenger ’s seatbelt
pretensioners also operate at the same
time.
If one of the rear wheel house impact
sensors and the impact sensor that is
located under the second-row center seat
together sense an impact force above a
predetermined level in a side collision, the
control module causes only the SRS
curtain airbag on the impacted side to
inflate.
If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the
vehicle, the control module inflates the
SRS curtain airbags. At this time, the
driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners also operate at the same
time.
After deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side airbag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while f ollowing deployment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be relea sed. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the
part of the roof side over the
second-row seat). Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to deploy in the event
of an accident involving a moderate to
severe side impact collision. Also, in the
case of a rollover, the SRS curtain airbag
deploys. They are not designed to deploy
in most lesser side impact. Also, they are
not designed to deploy in most frontal or
most rear impacts because SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy-
ment would not help the occupant in those
situations.
Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed to function on a one-
time-only basis.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
Black plate (93,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself. Also, the SRS curtain airbag de-
ploys depending on the vehicle’s position
and inclination at the time of the rollover.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS side airbag will most
likely deploy.
A severe side impact near the front seat
activates the SRS side airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-65
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (94,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-66 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most
likely deploy.
1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the second-row seat activates the
SRS curtain airbag.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) If the angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal
or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a
curbstone laterally.
Black plate (95,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy.
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-67
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (96,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-68 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to
deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
Black plate (97,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely
to deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-69
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (98,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-70 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
! Examples of the types of accidents
in which the SRS side airbag and
SRS curtain airbag will basically not
deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in most
cases if the vehicle is involved in a frontal
collision or is struck from behind. Exam-
ples of such accidents are illustrated.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
! Example of the type of accident in
which the SRS curtain airbag will
basically not deploy.
The SRS curtain airbags are not basically
designed to deploy if the vehicle pitches
end over end.
Black plate (99,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& SRS airbag system monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light “AIR-
BAG” will show normal system operation
by lighting for approximately 6 seconds
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator.
. Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
. Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact and rollover sensors)
. Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
. Frontal airbag module (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
. Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-
hand side)
. Side airbag module (driver’s side)
. Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
. Curtain a irbag sensor (rear wheel
house right-hand side)
. Curtain a irbag sensor (rear wheel
house left-hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
. Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
. Satellite safing sensor (under the sec-
ond-row center seat)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
. Seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Front passenger’s seatbelt tension
sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system weight sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which m ay in-
crease the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-71
– CONTINUED –
1
Black plate (100,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1-72 Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center console
. Inside each front fender
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s s ide and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the second-
row seat)
. Between the second-row seat
cushion and rear wheel house
on each side
. Under th e second -row cen ter
seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver ’s and front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the
second-row seat) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
. Center pillar, rear wheel house or
rear floor pan, or an area near these
parts, was involved in an accident in
which the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag did not deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of the
system or rendering the s ystem
inoperative, which may r esult in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
Black plate (101,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This incl udes following modifica-
tions.
. Installat ion of custom steering
wheels
. A ttachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat
. Attachment of a hands-free mi-
crophone or any other accessory
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
window, an assist grip, or any
other cabin surface that would be
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.
. Installation of additional electri-
cal/electronic equipment such as
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag s ystem
components and/or wiring is not
advisable. This could interfere
with prop er operati on of the
SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1-73
1
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Keys ..................................................................... 2-2
Key number plate................................................ 2-2
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security ID plate.................................................. 2-3
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4
Door locks ........................................................... 2-5
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-5
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-6
Power door locking switches............................. 2-7
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-8
Remote keyless entry system ............................ 2-8
Locking the doors ............................................... 2-9
Unlocking the doors........................................... 2-10
Unlocking the rear gate ...................................... 2-10
Illuminated entry ................................................ 2-10
Vehicle finder function........................................ 2-10
Sounding a panic alarm...................................... 2-11
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-11
Replacing the battery ......................................... 2-11
Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-12
Alarm system..................................................... 2-16
System operation............................................... 2-16
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-16
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-17
Arming the system ............................................ 2-17
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-18
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-18
Passive arming.................................................. 2-19
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-20
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-20
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-21
Windows............................................................. 2-21
Power windows ................................................. 2-21
Rear gate............................................................ 2-24
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-25
Tilt function ....................................................... 2-26
Sliding function ................................................. 2-26
Anti-entrapment function.................................... 2-26
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-27
Keys and doors
2
Black plate (104,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-2 Keys and doors
Keys
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Valet key
4) Key number plate
5) Security ID plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle.
Master key, submaster key and valet key.
The master key and submaster key fit all
locks on your vehicle.
. Ignition switch
. Driver’s door
. Glove box
The valet key fits only the ignition switch
and door locks. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your vehicle
and valet key at a parking facility.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“Acc” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle.
For information on making replacement
keys for models with the immobilizer
system, refer to “Security ID plate” F2-3.
Black plate (105,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Immobilizer
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an unau thorized person f rom
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. Even if
an unregistered key fits into the ignition
switch and can be turned to the “START”
position, the engine will automatically stop
after several seconds.
Each immobilizer key contains a trans-
ponder in which the key’s ID code is
stored. When a key is inserted into the
ignition switch and turned to the “ON”
position, the transponder transmits the
key’s ID code to the immobilizer system’s
receiver. If the transmitted ID code
matches the ID code registered in the
immobilizer system, the system allows the
engine to be started. Since the ID code is
transmitted and acted upon almost in-
stantly, the immobilizer system does not
impede normal starting of the engine.
If the engine does not start, pull out the
key once before trying again. Refer to
“Ignition switch” F3-3.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of I C
Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
NOTE
To protect your vehi cle from th eft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions.
. Never leave your vehicle unattended
with its keys inside.
. Before leaving your vehicle, close all
windows and lock the doors and rear
gate.
. Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
& Security ID plate
1) Key number plate
2) Security ID plate
The security ID is stamped on the security
ID plate attached to the key set. Write
down the security ID and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle.
This number is needed to make a replace-
ment key if you lose your key or lock it
inside the vehicle.
This number is also needed for replace-
ment or repair of the engine control unit,
Keys and doors 2-3
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (106,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-4 Keys and doors
integrated unit, and combination meter.
& Security indicator light
The security indicator light deters potential
thieves by indicating that the vehicle is
equipped with an immobilizer system. It
begins flashing approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned from the
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
pulled out.
If the security indicator light does not flash,
the immobilizer system may be malfunc-
tioning. If this occurs, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
In case an unauthorized key is used (e.g.
an imitation key), the security indicator
light illuminates.
NOTE
Even if the security indicator light
flashes irregularly or its fuse blows
(the light does not flash if its fuse is
blown), the immobilizer system will
function normally.
& Key replacement
Your key number plate and security ID
plate will be required if you ever need a
replacement key made. Any new key must
be registered for use with your vehicle’s
immobilizer system before it can be used.
Up to four keys can be registered for use
with one vehicle.
For security, all the keys registered with
your vehicle’s immobilizer system will
have their ID codes erase d and re-
registered when a new key is made.
Therefore, all of your vehicle’s keys must
be presented when a new key is regis-
tered. Any key that is not re-registered
when a new key is made cannot be used
after the other keys are re-registered. For
information on replacement keys and on
the registration of keys with your immo-
bilizer system, c ontact your SUBARU
dealer.
NOTE
A vehicle that is equipped with the
remote engine start system as a dealer
option can register up to three keys for
use with one vehicle.
Black plate (107,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the front.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
rear.
Lift the outside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Locking without the key
To lock the door from the outside without
the key, rotate the lock lever rearward and
then close the door.
Locking without the key
To lock the door from the outside using the
power door locking switch, push the “
”
sides of the switch and then close the
door. In this case, all closed doors and the
rear gate are locked at the same time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are locked before leaving your
vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
Keys and doors 2-5
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (108,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-6 Keys and doors
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden-
tally opened, and intruders from
unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever rearward.
To unlock the door from the inside, rotate
the lock lever forward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate are closed and locked before
starting to drive.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention func-
tion to prevent the battery from dischar-
ging. The following interior lights are
affected by this function.
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map lights OFF
Approximately 30
seconds later
Dome light DOOR
Approximately 10
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 10
minutes later
Door step
lights
— None*
Cargo area
light
DOOR
None*
*: Door step lights and the cargo area light are
not affected by the battery drainage prevention
function, so the lights do not turn off automa-
tically. To turn off the lights, it is necessary that
each door and the rear gate are completely
closed.
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When lea ving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
Black plate (109,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
gate are completely closed.
. The battery drainage prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switches
Driver’s switch
1) Lock
2) Unlock
Front passenger’s switch
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate can be locked
and unlocked by the power door locking
switches located at the driver’s side and
the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock all doors and the rear gate, push
the “
” side of the switch.
To unlock all doors and the rear gate, push
the “
” side of the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
Keys and doors 2-7
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (110,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-8 Keys and doors
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked with the key st ill in t he
ignition switch.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
. With either the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door open, the doors automatically
remain unlocked even if the “
” side of the
door locking switch is pushed.
. It is possible to lock the all doors and
the rear gate by holding the “
” side of the
door locking switch pushed for 3 seconds
with the driver ’s door open and then
closing the driver’s door.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the rear
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door f rom th e outsi de o f the
vehicle, the door is locked.
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setting can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
Remote keyless entry system
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitteronanairplane,donot
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operati on of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
Black plate (111,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
The transmitter for the remote keyless
entry system is located inside the key
head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate without a key
. Unlocking the rear gate without key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-16.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions.
The system’s operable distance will be
shorter in areas near a facility or electronic
equipment emitting strong radio waves
such as a power plant, broadcast station,
TV tower, or remote controller of home
electronic appliances.
NOTE
The remote keyless entry system does
not operate when the ignition key is
inserted in the ignition switch or when
any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed.
: Rear gate unlock button
: Unlock/disarm button
: Lock/arm button
A: Panic button
& Locking the doors
Press the “ ” button to lock all doors and
rear gate. An electronic chirp will sound
once and the turn signal lights will flash
once.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp will sound
five times and the turn signal lights will
flash five times to alert you that any of the
doors or the rear gate is not properly
closed. When you close the door, it will
automatically lock and then an electronic
chirp will sound once and the turn signal
lights will flash once.
Keys and doors 2-9
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (112,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-10 Keys and doors
& Unlocking the doors
Press the “ ” button to unlock the driver’s
door. An electronic chirp will sound twice
and the turn signal lights will flash twice.
To unlock all doors and the rear gate,
briefly press the “
” button a second time
within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “
” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond.
& Unlocking the rear gate
Pressing the “ ” button opens the rear
gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the turn signal lights will flash twice.
& Illuminated entry
Interior lights such as the map light, dome
light and cargo area light will illuminate
when the “
” button is pressed. These
lights remain illuminated for approximately
30 seconds if any of the doors or the rear
gate is not opened.
If the “
” button is pressed before 30
seconds have elapsed, these lights will
turn off.
To activate this function, set the following
interior light switches to the indicated
positions:
Map light: OFF position
Dome light: DOOR position
Cargo area light: DOOR position
A SUBARU dealer can change the illumi-
nation period setting of the interior lights in
accordance with your preference. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the “
”
button three times in a 5-second period
will cause your vehicle’s horn to sound
once and its turn signal lights to flash three
times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the “
” button
three times, the system may not re-
spond to the signals from the remote
transmitter.
Black plate (113,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sound and the turn signal
lights will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote transmitter is
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
Do the following to deactivate the audible
signal. You can also use the same steps
to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the
power door locking switch.
3. While holding down the “UNLOCK”
side of the power door locking switch, pull
the key out and re-insert it into the ignition
switch at least 6 times within 10 seconds
after Step 2.
4. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds after step 3.
5. The turn signal lights flash 3 times to
indicate completion of the setting.
You may have the above settings done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& Replacing the battery
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the transmitter when repla-
cing the battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the trans-
mitter when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
When the transmitter battery begins to get
weak, transmitte r range will begin to
decrease. Replace the battery as soon
as possible.
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw on the key head.
Keys and doors 2-11
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (114,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-12 Keys and doors
2. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
3. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
4. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
5. Remove the old battery from the
holder.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
6. Replace with a new battery (Type
CR1620 or equivalent) making sure to
install the new battery with the negative
(−) side facing up.
7. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on both sides of the case.
8. Put the transmitter case in the key
head and then put together the key head.
9. Reinstall the screw on the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “
” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a t ransmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), you should re-
program all of your transmitters for secur-
ity reasons. It is recommended that you
have your dealer program all of your
transmitters into your system.
! Programming the transmitters
The remote keyless entry system is
equipped with a special code learning
feature that allows you to program new
transmitter codes into the system or to
delete old ones. The system can learn up
to four unique transmitter codes. The four
transmitter codes may be the same or
Black plate (115,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
different.
Programming transmitter codes into
system:
Key tag
Transmitter circuit board
To register a new transmitter with the
remote keyless entry system, it is neces-
sary to program the transmitter’s code
(identification number) into the system. A
tag showing the code is affixed to the key
unit, and another is affixed to the circuit
board inside the transmitter. If there is no
tag, open the transmitter case and make a
note of the eight-digit number. Program
the number into the system in accordance
with the following procedure.
1. Firmly close the doors and the rear
gate.
2. Open the driver’s door, sit on the
driver’s seat, and close the door.
3. Perform the following steps within 45
seconds.
(1) Open and close the driver’s door
once.
1) LOCK
2) ON
(2) Insert the key into the ignition
switch, then turn it from the “LOCK”
position to the “ON” position 10 times
within 15 seconds.
NOTE
. When you complete step (2), an
electronic tone will sound once, a
buzzer will continue to sound and the
interior light will continue to flash until
the transmitter codes are completely
registered.
. If you do not perform steps (1) and
(2) within 45 seconds, an error will
occur. Neither an electronic tone nor
the buzzer will sound, and the interior
lamp will not flash. In this event, per-
Keys and doors 2-13
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (116,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-14 Keys and doors
form the whole procedure again begin-
ning with part 1.
4. Open and close the door once within
15 seconds.
NOTE
. When part 4 of the procedure is
completed, an electronic tone will
sound for 30 seconds.
. If you do not perform the operations
in part 4 within 15 seconds, an error
will occur and the electronic tone will
not sound. In this event, perform the
registration steps again beginning with
part 3 of the procedure.
5. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, push the “
” side of the power
door locking switch the same number of
times as the leftmost digit of the transmit-
ter code. For example, push the locking
switch eight times if the leftmost digit of
the code is 8.
NOTE
. The electronic tone will stop sound-
ing when you start entering the num-
ber.
. If you do not start entering t he
number using the lock knob before
the electronic tone stops sounding, an
error will occur. In this event, perform
the registration steps again beginning
with part 3 of the procedure.
. If the interval between one push of
the knob and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
6. When you have finished entering the
number, push the “
” side of the locking
switch within 5 seconds.
NOTE
. An electronic tone will sound.
. If you push the “
” side of the
locking switch when more than 5
seconds have passed, an error will
occur. In this event, perform the proce-
dure again beginning with part 4. If an
error occurs six times, perform the
procedure again starting with part 3.
7. Perform parts 5 and 6 of the procedure
for each of the remaining digits of the
transmitter code beginning with the sec-
ond digit (counting from the left) and
finishing with the eighth digit.
Black plate (117,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
NOTE
. When you finish entering the eighth
digit, an electronic tone will sound for
30 seconds.
. If the interval between one push of
the switch and the next exceeds 5
seconds, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 4. If an error occurs
six times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
8. Before the electronic tone stops
sounding, use the power door locking
switch to reenter the transmitter code
beginning with the leftmost digit.
NOTE
If you do not start entering the number
using the lock knob before the electro-
nic tone stops sounding, an error will
occur. In this event, perform the proce-
dure again beginning with part 3.
9. When you have finished entering the
code a second time, an electronic tone will
sound for 1 second and automatic door
locking and unlocking operation will take
place once to indicate completion of
registration, provided the code entered
the second time is identical to that entered
the first time.
NOTE
If the code entered the second time is
not identical to the code entered the
first time, an error will occur. In this
event, perform the procedure again
beginning with part 5. If an error occurs
five times, perform the procedure again
starting with part 3.
10. If you wish to program another trans-
mitter code into the system (up to four
transmitter codes can be programmed into
the system), perform the procedure begin-
ning with part 4. When you have finished
programming all of the necessary trans-
mitter codes into the system, remove the
key from the ignition switch.
11. Test every registered transmitter to
confirm correct operation.
! Deleting old transmitter codes
The control unit of the remote keyless
entry system has four memory locations to
store transmitter codes, giving it the ability
to operate with up to four transmitters.
When you lose a transmitter, the lost
transmitter’s code remains in the memory.
For security reaso ns, lost transmitter
codes should be deleted from the mem-
ory.
To delete old transmitter codes, program
four transmitter codes into the system. If
you have only one current transmitter,
program it four times. If you have two
current transmitters, program each one
twice. If you have three current transmit-
ters, program two of them once and the
third one twice. This process will leave
only current transmitter codes in the
system’s memory.
NOTE
Make sure no one else is operating
their keyless entry system within range
of your vehicle when programming
transmitters. If someone else were to
operate their remote transmitter while
you are programming your transmit-
ters, it is possible that their transmitter
code will be programmed into your
system, allowing them unauthorized
access to your vehicle.
Keys and doors 2-15
2
Black plate (118,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-16 Keys and doors
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the turn signal lights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle.
The system can be armed and disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system does not operate when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
& System operation
The alarm system will give the following
alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The turn signal lights will flash for 30
seconds.
If any of the doors or the rear gate remains
open after the 30-second period, the horn
will continue to sound for a maximum of 3
minutes. If any of the doors or the rear
gate is closed while the horn is sounding,
the horn will stop sounding with a delay of
up to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening any of the doors or the rear
gate
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only vehicles with shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
. Map lights
The notifications regarding the dome
light and the map lights are deactivated
as the factory setting. A SUBARU
dealer can activate the system. Contact
your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-18.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the UNLOCK side of the
driver’s power door locking switch, open
the driver’s door within the following 1
second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows.
If the system was previously activated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL oF” and the horn sounds twice,
indicating that the system is now deacti-
vated.
If the system was previously deacti-
vated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
“AL on” and the horn sounds once,
indicating that the system is now acti-
vated.
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (119,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations.
. Press any button on the remote trans-
mitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
& Arming the system
! To arm the system using remote
transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate.
: Press to Arm the system.
: Press to Disarm the system.
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors and the rear
gate will lock, an electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
once and the indicator lights will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the indicator
lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-
mately every 2 seconds), indicating that
the system has been armed for surveil-
lance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the turn signal lights flash five
times to alert you that the doors or the rear
gate are not properly closed. When you
close the door, the system will automati-
cally arm and doors will automatically lock.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switches
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close the doors and the rear gate but
leave only the driver’s door or the front
passenger’s door open.
Keys and doors 2-17
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (120,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-18 Keys and doors
6. Push the front side (“LOCK” side) of
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the turn signal lights will flash
once and the indicator lights will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standb y time), the indicator
lights will then flash slowly (twice approxi-
mately every 2 seconds), indicating that
the system has been armed for surveil-
lance.
NOTE
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, the windows and/or
moonroof are opened. Always make
sure that they are fully closed before
arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it per-
formed by your SUBARU dealer.
. The system is in the standby mode
for a 30-second period after locking the
doors with the remote transmitter. The
security indicator light will flash at
short intervals during this period.
. If any of the following actions is
done during the standby period, the
system will not switch to the surveil-
lance state.
– Doors a re unlocked using the
remote transmitter.
– Any of the doors or the rear gate
is opened.
– Ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
& Disarming the system
Briefly press the “ ” button (for less than
2 seconds) on the remote transmitter. The
driver’s door will unlock, an electronic
chirp will sound twice and the turn signal
lights will flash twice. The flashing of the
security indicator light will then change
slowly (once approximately every 3 sec-
onds from twice approximately every 2
seconds), indicating that the alarm system
has been disarmed.
To unlock all other doors and the rear
gate, brie fly pr ess the “
” button a
second time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the “
” button (for
unlocking of all of the doors and the
rear gate) is extremely short, the sys-
tem may not respond.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
transmitter (i.e. the transmitter is lost,
broken or the transmitter battery is too
weak), you can disarm the system without
using the transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “LOCK” to the
“ON” position with a registered key.
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate and panic activation.
To ent er the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
16. The security indicator light will con-
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
Black plate (121,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-16.
& Passive arming
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatica lly lock the
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as in-
dicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) LOCK
2) ON
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will
automatically arm after 1 minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter or
with the power door locking switches. If
the remote transmitter or power doo r
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard-
less of whether or not the passive mode
has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
“
” button on the transmitter.
Keys and doors 2-19
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (122,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-20 Keys and doors
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” pos ition, th e indicator light will
illuminate for 1 second and then flash as
follows.
. When a door or rear gate was opened:
5 times
. When the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position by using a key not
registered with your immobilizer system: 3
times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only vehicles
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only vehicles with shock sensors (dealer
option))
NOTE
Any of the above indicator light flash-
ing patterns will recur each time the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. Rearming the alarm system
cancels the flashing pattern of the
security indicator light.
& Shock sensors (dealer op-
tion)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires is cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the turn
signal lights to flash for a short time when
the sensed impact is weak, but it warns of
a strong impact or multiple impacts by
sounding the horn and flashing the turn
signal lights, both lasting approximately 30
seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration like those shown in the follow-
ing list and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Example:
– Vibration from construction site
– Vibration in multistory car park
– Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
ference by your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (123,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Child safety locks
WARNING
Always use the child safety lock
whenever a child rides in the rear.
Serious injury could result if a child
accidentally opened the door and
fell out.
Each rear door has a child safety lock that
prevents the door from being opened even
if the inside door handle is pulled.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from inside regardless of the position of
the inner door handle lock lever. The door
can only be opened from the outside.
Windows
& Power windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck or head from being caught
in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Before leaving t he vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the power window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
! Driver’s side switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left window
5) For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
Keys and doors 2-21
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (124,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-22 Keys and doors
! Operating the driver’s window
1) Open
2) Automatically open
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down feature that allows the window to be
opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
! Operating the passengers’ windows
To open:
Push the appropriate switch down and
hold it unti l the window reaches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
Black plate (125,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Locking the passengers’ windows
Push the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the “LOCK” position, the
passengers’ windows cannot be opened
or closed.
Press the switch again to cancel the
passengers’ window locking.
NOTE
When the lock switch is pushed to the
“LOCK” position, the indicator lights in
the passenger’s window switches (in-
cluded in the power window switch
cluster on the driver’s door) all turn off.
! Passengers’ side switches
Front passenger’s window switch
1) Open
2) Close
Rear passengers’ window switches
1) Open
2) Close
To open:
Push the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver ’s side door, is in the “LOCK”
position, the passengers’ windows cannot
be operated with the passengers’
switches.
Keys and doors 2-23
2
Black plate (126,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-24 Keys and doors
Rear gate
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches ” F2-7.
. Remote keyless entry system (if
equipped): Refer to “Remote keyless entry
system” F2-8.
To open:
First unlock the rear gate lock then push
the button.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous ex haust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
Black plate (127,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the
rear gate cannot be unlocked” F9-18.
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’s hands, arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or turns sharply or if the
vehicle is involved in an accident.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Before leaving t he vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child operat-
ing the moonroof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Keys and doors 2-25
– CONTINUED –
2
Black plate (128,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2-26 Keys and doors
& Tilt function
1) Tilt switch
2) Raise
3) Lower
The tilting function will only operate when
the moonroof is fully closed.
Push the rear side of the “Tilt” switch to
raise the moonroof.
Push the front side of the “Tilt” switch to
lower the moonroof.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered com-
pletely. Pushing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
NOTE
One-touch operation does not take
place when the moonroof is raised or
lowered. Push the switch continuously
to raise or lower the moonroof.
& Sliding function
1) Open/Close switch
2) Open
3) Close
Push the “ Open/Close” switch rearward to
open the moonroof. The sun shade will
also be opened together with the moon-
roof.
Push the “Open/Close” switch forward to
close the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop halfway. Push it again to close the
moonroof completely.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while opening or closing it,
momentarily push the switch to the
“OPEN” or “CLOSE” side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
& Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to either of the
following positions according to the point
at which it senses the object.
. When the moonroof senses the object
at a point between the halfway stop
position and fully closed position, it moves
back to the halfway stop position and
stops there.
. When the moonroof senses the object
at a point between the halfway stop
position and fully open position, it moves
back to the fully open position and stops
there.
The anti-entrapment function may also be
activated by a strong shock on the moon-
roof even when there is nothing trapped.
Black plate (129,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
Keys and doors 2-27
2
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Ignition switch ..................................................... 3-3
LOCK.................................................................. 3-3
Acc ..................................................................... 3-4
ON ...................................................................... 3-4
START ................................................................ 3-4
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-4
Ignition switch light............................................. 3-4
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-5
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-5
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-5
Canceling the function for meter needle/gauge
movement and combination meter sequential
illumination upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-5
Speedometer....................................................... 3-6
Odometer............................................................ 3-6
Double trip meter ................................................ 3-7
Tachometer ......................................................... 3-7
Fuel gauge.......................................................... 3-8
Temperature gauge ............................................. 3-8
Warning and indicator lights .............................. 3-9
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-10
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-11
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators......................................................... 3-12
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light................................................... 3-12
Charge warning light .......................................... 3-13
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-13
AT OIL TEMP warning light ................................. 3-13
Rear differential oil temperature warning
light ................................................................ 3-13
Low tire pressure warning light .......................... 3-14
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-15
Brake system warning light................................ 3-16
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-17
Door open warning light .................................... 3-17
Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-17
All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 3-18
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (U.S.-
spec models and Canada-spec. models)/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light (all
models) ........................................................... 3-18
Traction Control system OFF indicator light
(U.S.-spec models and Canada-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-19
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light (Latin
America-spec. models)/Traction Control OFF
indicator light (Latin America-spec. models) ..... 3-19
Security indicator light....................................... 3-21
SPORT mode indicator light ............................... 3-21
Select lever/Gear position indicator .................... 3-21
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-21
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-22
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 3-22
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 3-22
Headlight indicator light ..................................... 3-22
Front fog light indicator light.............................. 3-22
Clock .................................................................. 3-22
Outside temperature indicator.......................... 3-23
Low outside temperature warning ...................... 3-24
Instruments and controls
3
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Instruments and controls
Multi function display (vehicles without a
genuine SUBARU navigation system) ........... 3-24
Current fuel consumption ................................... 3-25
Average fuel consumption .................................. 3-25
Driving range on remaining fuel.......................... 3-26
Journey time...................................................... 3-27
Light control switch ........................................... 3-27
Headlights.......................................................... 3-28
High/low beam change (dimmer)......................... 3-28
Headlight flasher ................................................ 3-28
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-29
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-29
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-29
Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ................ 3-30
Parking light switch........................................... 3-32
Front fog light switch ........................................ 3-32
Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-33
Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-34
Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 3-35
Windshield wiper deicer.................................... 3-36
Rear window defogger button .......................... 3-37
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-38
Type A inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-38
Type B inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-38
Type C inside mirror (if equipped) ...................... 3-41
Outside mirrors ................................................. 3-42
Tilt ste ering wheel ............................................. 3-44
Horn.................................................................... 3-44
Black plate (133,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Ignition switch
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
“LOCK” while the vehicle is
being driven or towed because
that will lock the steering wheel,
preventing steering control. And
when the engine is turned off, it
takes a much greater effort than
usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you were driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “Acc” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a
keyholder or to a large bunch of
other keys, centrifugal force may act
on it as the vehicle moves, resulting
in unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, Acc, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “Acc” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “Acc”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
The key can be turned from “Acc” to
“LOCK” only when the select lever is in the
“P” position.
Instruments and controls 3-3
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (134,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-4 Instruments and controls
& Acc
In this position the electrical accessories
(radio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
If your registered key fails to start the
engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key in the ignition switch and turn it to
the “START” position and again try to start
the engine.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases.
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door opens and the key is in the
“LOCK” or “Acc” positions. The chime
stops when the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
& Ignition switch light
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when the driver’s door is opened.
The light remains on for several seconds
and then gradually turns off after driver’s
door is closed. Also, the light turns off
immediately if the key is turned to the “ON”
position.
Black plate (135,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works with the
ignition switch in any position.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. To turn off the flasher,
push the button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
NOTE
Liquid crystal displays are used in
some of the meters and gauges on
the combination meter. You will find
their indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-
tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the various parts of the
combination meter are illuminated in the
following sequence.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
rims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,
and gauge back lights illuminate.
2. Meter needles and gauges each show
MAX reading.
3. Meter needles and gauges each show
MIN reading.
4. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.
5. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
NOTE
The above sequence of operations may
not take place if you quickly turn the
ignition switch to start the engine. This
is not a malfunction.
& Canceling the function for
meter needle/gauge move-
ment and combination meter
sequential illumination upon
turning on the ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauges and sequential illumination of the
combination meter that takes place when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
Turn the igniti on switch to the “Acc”
position. With the A trip meter indication
selected, briefly press the trip knob twice.
You can now establish the activated/
deactivated setting for movement of the
Instruments and controls 3-5
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (136,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-6 Instruments and controls
meter needles and g auge s whe n the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position. To change the current setting,
press the trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
With the function deactivated, the combi-
nation meter illuminates as follows.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
rims, meter needles, odometer, trip meter,
and gauge back lights illuminate.
2. Meter and gauge dials illuminate.
3. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
Briefly press the trip knob again. You can
now establish the activated/deactivated
setting for sequential illumination of the
combination meter when the ign ition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. To
change the current setting, press the trip
knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
Briefly press the knob to return to the A trip
meter indication.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position, turn the ignition switch
to the “ON” position, or open and close the
driver’s door during the setting procedure,
the new setting will be canceled.
Also, if you do not press the trip knob for a
period of 10 seconds, the new setting will
be canceled.
NOTE
. It is not possible to cancel sequen-
tial illumination of the combination
meter while sequential illumination is
actually taking place. Cancel sequen-
tial illumination when regular illumina-
tion (for driving) has begun.
. When you open the driver’s door
with the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position, the meters’ needles and rims
are lit. The illumination stops working
when you shut the driver’s door or
automatically after 30 seconds.
& Speedometer
The speedo meter shows the veh icle
speed.
& Odometer
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “Acc”
or “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the odometer/trip meter will light up. If you
do not press the trip knob within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
off.
Black plate (137,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
The odometer/trip meter will also turn off if
you open and close the driver’sdoor
within 10 seconds of illumination of the
odometer/trip meter.
& Double trip meter
This meter displays two trip meters when
the ignition switch is in the “LOCK”, “Acc”
or “ ON” position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
To change the mode indication, briefly
push the knob.
Each press of the knob changes the mode
indication alternately.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pushing the knob
and keep the knob pushed for more than 2
seconds.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position , the
odometer/trip meter will light up. It is
possible to switch between the A trip
meter and B trip meter indications while
the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If you do
not press the trip knob within 10 seconds
of illumination of the odometer/trip meter,
the odometer/trip meter will turn off. Also,
if you open and close the driver’s door
within 10 seconds of illumination of the
odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
! Vehicle communication system
malfunction indication
The vehicle communication system car-
ries various types of information (vehicle
speed, running conditions, etc.) to control
modules. In the event of a malfunction in
this communication system, the trip meter
will show “
”.
If the trip meter shows “
”, immediately
contact the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle communication system
inspected.
NOTE
If you press the trip knob while the trip
meter is showing “
”, the trip meter
indication will appear for 10 seconds.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
Instruments and controls 3-7
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (138,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-8 Instruments and controls
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. This may cause severe da-
mage to the engine.
NOTE
To protect the engine while the select
lever is in the “P” or “N” position, the
engine is controlled so that the engine
speed may not become too high even if
the accelerator pedal is depressed
hard.
& Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge shows the approximate
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during
braking, turning or acceleration due to fuel
level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “Acc” position,
the fuel gauge will light up and indicate the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge meter.
This indicates that the fuel filler door
(lid) is located on the right side of the
vehicle.
& Temperature gauge
1) Normal operating range
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The coolant temperature will vary in
accordance with the outside temperature
and driving conditions.
We recommend that you drive moderately
until the pointer of the temperature gauge
reaches near the middle of the range.
Engine operation is optimum with th e
engine coolant at this temperature range.
Also, high revving operation while the
engine is not sufficiently warmed up
should be avoided.
Black plate (139,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
CAUTION
If the pointer exceeds the normal
operating range, safely stop the
vehicle as soon as possible.
Refer to “Engine overheating” F9-
14.
Warning and indicator lights
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate momentarily and then turn off
when the ignition switch is initially turned
to the “ON” position. This permits check-
ing the operation of the bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and turn off after several sec-
onds or after the engine has started:
: Driver’s seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the driver fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
/ : ABS warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
(U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec.
models)/Vehicle Dynamics Control op-
eration indicator light (all models)
: Traction Control system OFF indicator
light (U.S.-spec. models and Canada-
spec. models)
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light
(Latin America-spec. models)/Traction
Control system OFF indicator light
(Latin America-spec. models)
/ : Brake system warning light
: AWD warning light
: Low tire pressure warning light
: SPORT mode indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator light
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator light
: Low fuel warning light
: Cruise control indicator light
: Cruise control set indicator light
: Rear differential oil temperature warn-
ing light
: Windshield washer fluid warning light
Instruments and controls 3-9
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (140,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-10 Instruments and controls
: Door open warning light
If any lights do not illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by illuminating the warning lights in
the locations indicated in the following
illustrations and sounding a chime.
Driver’s warning light
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) is/are still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alt ernate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation that follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch . When the ignition sw itch is
Black plate (141,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat. Observe the
following precautions. Failure to do so
may prevent the device from functioning
correctly or cause the device to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy load in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the second-row seat
occupant to place his/her hands or legs
on the front passenger’s seatback, or
allow him/her to pull the seatback.
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child occupant.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the SRS airbag system
warning light will illuminate for approxi-
mately 6 seconds and turn off. This shows
the SRS frontal airbag and SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag and seat-
belt pretensioners are in normal operation.
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbe lt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbags will operate improperly (e.g.
SRS airbags may inflate in a very
minor collision or not inflate in a
severe collision), which m ay in-
crease the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Instruments and controls 3-11
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (142,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-12 Instruments and controls
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indica-
tors
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located in the center
portion of the dashboard.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
If both the ON and OFF indicators remain
illuminated or off simult aneously, the
system is malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for an in-
spection.
& CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emission
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that th ere is a problem or pote ntial
problem somewhere in the emission con-
trol system.
! If the light illuminates steadily
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light turn off immediately. It may
take several driving trips. If the light does
not turn off, take your vehicle to your
authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
Black plate (143,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the
following.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. Stop towing a t railer as soon as
possible.
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Charge warning light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nea rest S UBA RU de aler
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning l ight illumi-
nated. This may cause serious en-
gine damage.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the automatic
transmission fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Automatic transmission control
system warning
If the light flashes after the engine starts, it
may indicate that the automatic transmis-
sion control system is not working prop-
erly. Contact your nearest SUBARU deal-
er for service immediately.
& Rear differential oil
temperature warning
light
CAUTION
Reduce vehicle speed and park the
vehicle in a safe place as soon as
possible if the R.DIFF TEMP light
illuminates. Continued driving with
this light illuminated can damage
the rear differential and other parts
of the powertrain.
If this light illuminates when the engine is
run ning, it may indicate that the rear
differential oil temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, reduce
vehicle speed and stop the vehicle at the
Instruments and controls 3-13
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (144,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-14 Instruments and controls
nearest safe place.
Park the vehicle for several minutes. After
the light turns off, you can start driving.
If the light does not turn off, contact the
nearest SUBARU dealer for service.
NOTE
. If the tire pressures are not correct
and/or the tires are not all the same
size and brand, the rear differential will
be heavily loaded when the vehicle is
driven, resulting in an abnormally high
oil temperature.
. The rear differential oil will deterio-
rate if its temperature increases en-
ough for the rear differential oil tem-
perature warning light to illuminate. It is
advisable to have the rear differential
oil replaced as soon as possible.
& Low tire pressure
warning light
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note t hat the TPMS is not a
subst itute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver ’s responsibi lity to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the ma lfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire p ressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wh eels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
Black plate (145,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have signif icant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
that the TPMS is unable to monitor
all four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pre ssure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). Therefore, after adjusting the
tire pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to
start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires.
& ABS warning light
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not
work properly.
When the warning light illuminates,
the ABS function shuts down; how-
ever, the conventional brake system
continues to operate normally.
. The warning light does not illu-
minate when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, but
it does not turn off even when the
vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light illuminates dur-
ing driving.
If any of these conditions occur,
have the ABS system repaired at
the first avai lable opportunity by
your SUBARU dealer.
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
gether with the brake system warning light
if the EBD system becomes malfunction-
ing. For further details of the EBD system
Instruments and controls 3-15
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (146,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-16 Instruments and controls
malfunction warning, refer to “Brake sys-
tem warning light” F3-16.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following, the ABS
system may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning l ight remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfu nction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working
properly. If the light remains
illuminated, have the brakes in-
spected by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
This light has the following three functions.
! Parking brake warning
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe place
and check the brake fluid level. If the fluid
level is below the “MIN” mark in t he
reservoir, do not drive the vehicle. Have
the vehicle towed to the nearest SUBARU
dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning l ight illuminate simultan eously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-
what harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
Black plate (147,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
warni ng light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat place.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake, and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive c arefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
& Low fuel warning light
CAUTION
Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
The low fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10 liters, or 2.2 Imp
gal). It only operates when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. When this
light illuminates, fill the fuel tank immedi-
ately.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.0 US
gal (15 liters, 3.3 Imp gal).
& Door open warning light
The indicators are located in the center
portion of the dashboard.
When any of the doors or the rear gate is
not fully closed, it is indicated by the
corresponding part of the door open
warning light.
Always make sure this light is out before
you start to drive.
& Windshield washer
fluid warning light
This light illuminates when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank falls to
the lower limit (approximately 0.6 US qt,
0.6 liter, 0.5 Imp qt).
Instruments and controls 3-17
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (148,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-18 Instruments and controls
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light
WARNING
Continued driving with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage. If the AWD
warning light flashes, promptly park
in a safe place then check whether
all four tires are the same diameter
and whether any of the tires has a
puncture or has lost air pressure for
some other reason.
NOTE
If the temporary spare tire is used, the
AWD warning light may flash. Use of
the temporary spare tire should there-
fore be restricted to the minimum time
necessary. Replace the temporary
spare tire with a conventional tire as
soon as possible.
This light flashes if the vehicle is driven
with tires of different diameters fitted on its
wheels or with the air pressure exces-
sively low in any of its tires.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light
(U.S.-spec models and
Canada-spec. models)/
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
light (all models)
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light (U.S.-spec models and
Canada-spec. models)
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the w arning light to illuminate.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS systems are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary
functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
Black plate (149,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec.
models:
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
existence of a problem. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
Latin America-spec. models:
The indicator light flashes when the skid
suppression function is activated. It illumi-
nates when only the trac tion control
function is operating.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible .
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started (U.S.-spec. models and Canada-
spec. models)/e ven after a period of
approximately 2 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned to the “ON”
position (Latin America-spec. models).
& Traction Control sys-
tem OFF indicator light
(U.S.-spec models and
Canada-spec. models)
This light illuminates when the Traction
Control system OFF switch is pressed to
deactivate the Traction Control system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even after a
period of approximately 2 seconds after
the ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light
(Latin America-spec.
models)/Traction Con-
trol OFF indicator light
(Latin America-spec.
models)
This warning light functions to indicate
malfunctions in the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system as well as to indicate that
the Traction Control system has been
deactivated.
It illuminates in the event of a malfunction
in the system and is on when the system
is not operating.
Instruments and controls 3-19
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (150,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-20 Instruments and controls
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS system. Accordingly, if the ABS
is inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to illuminate.
Though both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control and ABS systems are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary
functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, only the warning light illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
engine startup and turns off while the
vehicle is subsequently being driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
! Traction Control OFF indicator light
. It illuminates when the Traction Control
OFF switch is pressed.
. It also illuminates when the Traction
Control system is deactivated.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a while after the engine has b een
started, especially in cold weather. This
does not indicate the existence of a
problem. The light should turn off as
soon as the engine has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
Malfunction indicator light illuminates.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the listed
condition. Have your vehicle checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
Black plate (151,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Security indicator light
The indicators are located in the center
portion of the dashboard.
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system ” F2-
16.
! Immobilizer system
This light blinks approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned from
“ON” position to the “Acc” or “LOCK”
position or immediately after the key is
pulled out. Refer to “Immobilizer” F2-3.
If the indicator light does not flash, it may
indicate that immobilizer system may be
malfunctioning . Contac t your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used, the security indicator light illumi-
nates.
& SPORT mode indicator
light
When the select lever is moved to the
manual gate, the SPORT mode is se-
lected and the indicator light illuminates.
Refer to “SPORT mode” F7-18.
& Select lever/Gear position in-
dicator
The select lever/gear position indicator
shows the position of the select lever.
When manual mode is selected, the gear
position indicator shows the current gear
position and the upshift/downshift indica-
tor illuminates. Refer to “Automatic trans-
mission” F7-12.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-36.
Instruments and controls 3-21
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (152,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-22 Instruments and controls
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indica-
tor light
This light illuminates when the “CRUISE”
main switch is pressed to activate the
cruise control function.
NOTE
. If you move the cruise control lever
or press the main switch button while
turning the ignition switch “ON”, the
cruise control function is deactivated
and the cruise control indicator light
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
function, turn the ignition switch back
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
. If this indicator light and the CHECK
ENGINE warning light/malfunction in-
dicator light flash simultaneously dur-
ing driving, have the vehicle checked
by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Cruise control set in-
dicator light
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set to use the cruise control
function.
& Headlight indicator
light
This indicator light illuminates when the
light switch is turned to the “
” position
(to turn on the parking lights) or to the
“
” position (to turn on the headlights).
& Front fog light indicator
light
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
Clock
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the navigation system.
The clock shows the time while t he
ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
Black plate (153,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
To adjust the time shown by the clock,
press the “+” button or the “−” button. The
indicated time will change in 1-minute
increm ents. If you keep the button
pressed, the rate at which the indicated
time changes will speed up.
When you keep either the “+” or “−” button
pressed, time change will pause for 1
second at the end of each 30-minute
change. The clock will start going forward
or backward again quickly after this 1-
second pause.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
set the time during driving, as an
accident could result.
Outside temperature indica-
tor
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the navigation system.
U.S.-spec. models
Except U.S.-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−22 to 1228F(−30 to 508C) when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions.
. When there is too much sun.
. During idli ng; while ru nning at low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
down.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
Instruments and controls 3-23
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (154,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-24 Instruments and controls
& Low outside temperature
warning
U.S.-spec. models
Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to
378F(38C) or lower, the temperature
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 seconds before returning to its
original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indication does not
flash.
NOTE
The outside temperature indication
may differ from t he actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
Multi function display (vehi-
cles without a genuine
SUBARU navigation system)
NOTE
. If your vehicle is equipped with a
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the navigation system.
. A liquid crystal display is used in the
multi function display. You will find its
indications hard to see if you wear
polarized glasses.
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, each successive push of the
“INFO” button toggles the display in the
following sequence.
Press the “INFO” button for more than 1
second to turn off the display. The display
will turn on again if you press either the
“INFO” button or “AUDIO” button.
Black plate (155,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Current fuel consumption
U.S.-spec. models
Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
& Average fuel consumption
U.S.-spec. models
Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
Pressing the trip knob toggles the indica-
tion between the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the A trip meter
indication and the average fuel consump-
tion corresponding to the B trip meter
indication.
When either of the trip meter indications is
reset, the correspon ding aver age fuel
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values may differ slightly from the
actual va lues and should thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter indication is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter indica-
tion is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
Instruments and controls 3-25
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (156,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-26 Instruments and controls
& Driving range on remaining
fuel
U.S.-spec. models
Except U.S.-spec. models
The driving range indicates the distance
that can be driven taking into account the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption.
When the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates, the driving range indication flashes
for 5 seconds. (The display first switches
to the driving range indication if it was
originally giving some other indication.)
U.S.-spec. models
Except U.S.-spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-
ately.
NOTE
. The driving range on remaining fuel
is only a guide. The indicated value
may differ from the actual driving range
on remaining fuel, so you must imme-
diately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
. When the low fuel warning light
illuminates, the display automatically
shows “
” even if the currently
selected indication is not for the driv-
ing range on remaining fuel.
Black plate (157,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Journey time
The journey time shows the time that has
elapsed since the ignition switch was
turned to the “START” position.
The journey time indication flashes each
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the
display is giving an indication other than
the journey time, the display switches to
the journey time, flashes for 5 seconds,
and returns to its original indication each
time a complete hour has elapsed.
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position. It is also reset if the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK” or
“Acc” position prior to restarting of
the engine.
Light control switch
WARNING
To prevent battery discharge result-
ing from accidentally leaving your
lights on when your vehicle is
parked, the light switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position. In any other
position, the vehicle’s lights will be
out.
If you park your vehicle on a road-
side at night, use the hazard warn-
ing flasher to alert the other drivers.
The light switch operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Instruments and controls 3-27
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (158,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-28 Instruments and controls
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
first position
Parking lights, instrument panel illumina-
tion, tail lights and license plate light are
on.
second position
Headlights, parking lights, instrument pa-
nel illumination, tail lights, and license
plate light are on.
& High/low beam change (dim-
mer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter also illuminates.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the detent position.
& Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will remain on for as long as you
hold the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the light switch is in the
“OFF” position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
Black plate (159,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Daytime running light system
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “
” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-
cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the engine has started, under the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light switch is in the “OFF” or “
”
position.
NOTE
When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the front side marker lights,
parking lights and license plate lights
are also illuminated.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
Illumination brightness con-
trol
When the light switch is in the “OFF”
position, you can adjust the brightness of
the instrument panel illumination for better
visibility.
The brightness of audio, air conditioner,
multi-function display (if equipped) and
instrument panel illumination automati-
cally dims when the light switch is in the
“
” or “ ” position. You can adjust
brightness of the illumination for better
visibility.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
Instruments and controls 3-29
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (160,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-30 Instruments and controls
NOTE
When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the illuminatio n brightness
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
Headlight beam leveler (if
equipped)
Adjust the headlight beam level with the
following dial positions according to the
number of passengers and load condition.
Black plate (161,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Dial position Number of front seat
occupants
Number of 2nd seat
occupants
Number of 3rd seat
occupants
Load in the luggage
compartment area
Trailer towing
0 1 or 2 0 0 No load No
1
2 0 2 No load No
2
2 3 2 No load No
3
2 3 2 Full load No
2 3 2 Full load Yes
4
1 0 0 Full load No
1 0 0 Full load Yes
5
Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable
Instruments and controls
3-31
3
Black plate (162,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-32 Instruments and controls
Parking light switch
The parking light switch operates regard-
less of the ignition switch position.
By pushing the front end of this switch,
following lights will illuminate.
– Parking lights
– Front and rear side marker lights
– Tail lights
– License plate lights
To turn off, push the rear end of the
parking light switch.
Avoid leaving these lights on for a long
time because that will run down the
battery.
Front fog light switch
The front fog lights operate only when the
light switch is in the “
” position.
However, the front fog lights turn off when
the headlights are switched to high beam.
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the fog
light switch on the turn signal lever upward
to the “
” position.
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “OFF” position.
The indicator light on the combinat ion
meter will illuminate when the fog lights
are illuminated.
Black plate (163,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise the washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
cause the wiper motor to burn
out. Before operating the wiper
on a dry windshield or rear
window, always use the wind-
shield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades f rozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also the wiper mo-
tor to burn out. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the window
glass, be sure to operate the
defroster, wiper deicer (if
equipped) or rear window defog-
ger before turning on the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, the
wiper motor could burn out even
if the wiper switch is turned off. If
this occurs, promptly stop the
vehicle in a safe place, turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper op-
eration.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washer
fluid” F11-28.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The front wiper motor is protected
against overloads by a circuit breaker.
The motor operates continuously un-
der an unusually heavy load, the circuit
breaker may trip to stop the motor
temporarily. If this happens, park your
vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Keep the washer button
depressed at least for 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
Instruments and controls 3-33
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (164,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-34 Instruments and controls
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blades results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”
F11-29.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “Acc” position.
! Windshield wipers
OFF: Off
: Intermittent
LO: Low speed
HI: High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “OFF” position.
! Mist (for a single wipe)
For a single wipe of the wipers, pull the
lever toward you. The wipers operate until
you release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
Black plate (165,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper.
The operating interval can be adjusted in
nine steps.
The intermittent operation interval varies
depending on the vehicle speed in any of
the adjustment steps (longer when the
vehicle speed is low; shorter when the
vehicle speed is high).
! Washer
To wash the windshield, push the washer
button at the end of the wiper control lever.
The washer fluid sprays until you release
the washer button. The wipers operate
while you push the button.
NOTE
The windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
tank refilling method, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-28.
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch
: Washer (accompanied by wiper operation)
ON: Continuous
INT: Intermittent
OFF: Off
: Washer
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob on
the end of the wiper control lever upward
to the “INT” or “ON” position.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob on
the end of the lever to the “OFF” position.
With the switch turned to the “INT”
position, the rear wiper will operate inter-
mittently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed (longer when the vehicle
Instruments and controls 3-35
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (166,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-36 Instruments and controls
speed is low; shorter when the vehicle
speed is high).
When you subsequently move the select
lever of the automatic transmission to the
“R” position, the rear wiper will switch to
continuous operation. When you move the
select lever from the “R” position to some
other position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever upward to
the “
” position. The washer fluid sprays
until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob on the
end of the wiper control lever downward to
the “
” position. The washer fluid sprays
and the wiper operates until you release
the knob.
Windshield wiper deicer
The windshield wiper deicer operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
To turn on the windshield wiper deicer,
push the control switch. The indicator light
located on the switch illuminates while the
windshield wiper deicer is operating.
To turn it off, push the control switch again.
It also turns off when the ignition switch is
turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position.
The windshield wiper deicer will automa-
tically shut off a fter approximatel y 15
minutes. If the windshield wiper blades
have been deiced completely before that
time, push the control switch to turn it off. If
deicing is not complete, you have to push
the control switch to turn it on again.
Your SUBARU dealer can set your wind-
shield wiper deice r to the conti nuous
operation mode. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details.
Once the windshield wiper deicer has
been set to the con tin uous o peratio n
mode, it should be in th e continuous
operation mode at any time when the
control switch is pushed to the “ON”
position.
If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
the windshield wiper deicer is canceled
and the system stops operating.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
windshield wiper deicer continu-
ously for any longer than necessary.
NOTE
. Turn on the windshield wiper deicer
if the wipers are frozen to the wind-
shield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
Black plate (167,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
tively.
. While the windshield wiper deicer is
in the continuous operation mode, if
the vehicle speed remains at 9 mph (15
km/h) or less for 15 minutes, the wind-
shield wiper deicer automatically stops
operating.
Rear window defogger but-
ton
The rear window defogger operates only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
To turn on the defogger, push the control
switch that is located on the climate
control panel. The indicator light located
on the control switch illuminates while the
rear window defogger is operating.
To turn it off, push the control switch again.
It also turns off when the ignition switch is
turned to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position.
The defogger will automatically shut off
after approximately 15 minutes. If the rear
window has been cleared completely
before that time, push the control switch
to turn it off. If defrosting or defogging is
not complete, you have to push the control
switch to turn it on again.
Your SUBARU dealer can set your rear
window defogger to the continuous opera-
tion mode. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details.
Once the rear window defogger has been
set to the continuous operation mode, it
should be in the continuous operation
mode at any time when the control switch
is pushed to the “ON” position.
If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
the rear window defogger is canceled and
the system stops operating.
CAUTION
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger continuously for any
longer than necessary.
Instruments and controls 3-37
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (168,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-38 Instruments and controls
NOTE
The outside mirror defogger also oper-
ates while the rear window defogger is
operating.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Type A inside mirror (if
equipped)
The mirror has a day and night position.
Pull the tab at the bottom of the mirror
toward you for the night position. Push it
away for the day position . The night
position reduces glare from headlights.
& Type B inside mirror (if
equipped)
1) Rear view image display
2) Electronic compass display
3) Auto dimming indicator
4) Multifunction button
5) Photosensor
The mirror has the following features.
. Rear view image display
. Auto-dimming function for anti-glare
capability
. Electronic compass display
You can display the various functions of
these features based on how long you
press the multifunction button.
Black plate (169,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Gear
position
Period of
time multi-
function
button is
pressed
Function
displayed
R (reverse)
Briefly
Rear view display
ON/OFF*
More than
3 seconds
Help lines indica-
tion ON/OFF
Except
R (reverse)
Briefly
Auto-dimming
function ON/OFF*
3to6
seconds
Electronic com-
pass display ON/
OFF
6to9
seconds
Enter the com-
pass zone setting
mode
9to12
seconds
Enter the com-
pass calibration
mode
*: The setting returns to “ON” as a default
setting every time the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
! Rear view image display
When the ignition switch is “ON” and the
select lever is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
inside mirror.
Also, the following help lines are indicated
as a guide to help you realize the actual
distance from the display.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
These he lp l ines ar e remo vable. To
remove the help lines, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Display the rear view image on the
mirror.
2. Press the multifunction button for more
than 3 seconds to remove the help lines.
To display the help lines, press the multi-
function button for more than 3 seconds.
For precautions about the rear view
camera and the rear view image, refer to
“Rear view camera” F6-21.
! Auto-dimming function
The auto-dimming function is an anti-glare
capability which automaticall y reduces
glare coming from headlights of vehicles
behind you.
By briefly pressing the multifunction but-
ton, the auto-dimming function is toggled
on or off. When the auto-dimming function
is on, the auto dimming indicator light
(green) will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
Instruments and controls 3-39
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (170,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-40 Instruments and controls
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. Use care
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
other similar items. Periodically wipe the
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
cotton cloth or an applicator.
NOTE
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar item dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray gla ss
cleaner directly on the mirror surface.
By doing so, the sprayed glass cleaner
could enter the inside of the mirror
housing. That may cause a malfunction
in the mirror.
! Electronic compass display
By pressing the multifunction button for 3
to 6 seconds, the compass display is
toggled on or off. When the compass
display is on, an illumin ated compass
reading will appear on the mirror.
Using the electronic compass properly,
the following compass zone adjustment
and compass calibration will be neces-
sary.
! Compass zone adjustment
1. The compass zone has been set to
zone “8” at the time of shipment from the
factory. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map, which is attached to the end
of this manual to verify that the compass
zone setting is correct for your geographi-
cal location.
2. Press and hold the multifunction but-
ton for 6 to 9 seconds, and then release it.
The zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the multifunction button repeat-
edly to cycle the display through all
possible zone settings. Stop cycling when
the correct zone number for your location
is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the multifunction but-
ton for 9 to 12 seconds, and then release
it. The compass will enter the calibration
mode, then “C” and the direction will be
displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “C”
disappears from the display. Driving in
two or three circles might be necessary.
The compass is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside influences cause the com-
pass to read inaccurately. You will notice
any outside influence if the compass tends
to read in only one particular direction.
Should you encounter this situation, return
to step 1 of the above procedure and
recalibrate the compass.
Black plate (171,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Type C inside mirror (if
equipped)
1) Left button
2) Auto dimming indicator
3) Photosensor
4) Right button
This mirror has an anti-glare feature which
automatically reduces glare coming from
headlights of vehicles behind you. It also
contains a built-in compass.
. By pressing and releasing the left
button, the automatic dimming function is
toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the auto dimming
indicator light (green) located to the right
of the button will illuminate.
. By pressing and releasing the right
button, the compass display is toggled on
or off. When the compass is on , an
illuminated compass reading will appear
in the lower part of the mirror.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. If the glare
from the headlights of vehicles behind you
strikes the mirror, these sensors detect it
and make the reflection surface of the
mirror dimmer to help prevent you from
being blinded. For this reason, use care
not to cover the sensors with stickers, or
other similar items. Periodically wipe the
sensors clean using a piece of dry soft
cotton cloth or an applicator.
! Compass calibration
1. For optimum calibration, switch off all
nonessential electrical accessories (rear
window defogger, heater/air conditioning
system, spotlight, etc.) and ensure all
doors are shut.
2. Drive to an open, level area away from
large metallic objects or structures and
make certain the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
3. Press and hold the left button for 3
seconds then release, and the compass
will enter the calibration mode. “CAL” and
direction will be displayed.
4. Drive slowly in a circle until “CAL”
disappears from the display (approxi-
mately two or three circles). The compass
is now calibrated.
5. Further calibration may be necessary
should outside influences cause the mirror
to read inaccurately. You will know that
this has occurred if your compass begins
to read in only limited directions. Should
you encounter this situation, return to step
one of the above procedure and recali-
brate the mirror.
Instruments and controls 3-41
– CONTINUED –
3
Black plate (172,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-42 Instruments and controls
! Compass zone adjustment
1. The zone setting is factory preset to
Zone 8. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zone” map attached to the end of this
manual to verify that the compass zone
setting is correct for your geographical
location.
2. Press and hold the right button for 3
seconds then release, and the word
“ZONE” will briefly appear and then the
zone number will be displayed.
3. Press the right-hand button repeatedly
to cycle the display through all possible
zone settings. Stop cycling when the
correct zone setting for your location is
displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 3 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
& Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge t he
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and dis-
tance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“Acc” position.
1. Turn the knob to the “L” side to adjust
the left-hand mirror or to the “R” side to
adjust the right-hand mirror.
2. Move the knob in the direction you
want to move the mirror.
3. Return the knob to the neutral position
to prevent unintentional operation.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
Black plate (173,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Outside mirror defogger
The outside mirror defogger shares the
control switch with the rear window de-
fogger. Therefore, the outside mirror de-
fogger always operates with the rear
window defogger.
If the rear window defogger is set to the
continuous operation mode, the outside
mirror defogger also follows the contin-
uous setting.
For details, refer to “Rear window defog-
ger button” F3-37.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the de-
fogger continuously for any longer
than necessary.
! Power folding mirror switch (if
equipped)
1) Power folding mirror switch
The power folding mirror switch operates
only when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
or “Acc” position.
To fold the outside mirrors, push the power
folding mirror switch. To unfold the mirrors,
push the switch again.
NOTE
. When the temperature is low, the
outside mirrors may stop during opera-
tion. Push the switch again. When the
outside mirrors do not work by switch
operation, move them several times
manually. This makes it possible to
operate them by switch operation.
. When you operate the power folding
mirror switch continuously, it may
temporarily stop working. This is not
a malfunction. Operate it again after
waiting for a short period of time.
. When you unfold the outside mirrors
manually, the mirrors may become
unstable. Be sure to unfold the mirrors
by switch operation. If the outside
mirrors are still unstable, fold the
mirrors again manually and then unfold
them by switch operation.
Instruments and controls 3-43
3
Black plate (174,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3-44 Instruments and controls
Tilt steering wheel
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel tilt
position while driving. T his may
cause loss of vehicle control and
result in personal injury.
1. Adjust the seat posi tion. Refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down.
Horn
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Ventilator.............................................................. 4-2
Airflow ................................................................ 4-2
Ventilator ............................................................ 4-4
Automatic climate control system ..................... 4-5
Control panel ...................................................... 4-5
Rear air conditioner............................................. 4-9
Temperature sensors........................................... 4-9
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner....................................................... 4-10
Cleaning ventilator grille..................................... 4-10
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-10
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-10
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-10
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-10
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-11
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-11
Air filtration system ........................................... 4-11
Replacing the air filter........................................ 4-11
Climate control
4
Black plate (178,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4-2 Climate control
Ventilator
& Airflow
Ventilator and airflow
: Standard
: If equipped
Black plate (179,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Airflow mode selection
*: If equipped
Climate control
4-3
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (180,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4-4 Climate control
& Ventilator
! Center ventilators
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
! Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Move the tab to adjust the flow direction.
To open the ventilator, turn the side grille
open/close wheel upward.
To close it, turn the wheel downward.
! Rear ventilators
Move the tab or rotate it to adjust the flow
direction.
Black plate (181,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Automatic climate control
system
NOTE
. Operate the automatic climate con-
trol system when the engine is running.
. The blower fan rotates at a low
speed when the engine coolant tem-
perature is low.
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, press the “A/C”
button.
. The vehicle has a rear air condi-
tioner. The fan speed of the rear air
conditioner can be adjusted, but other
adjustments (outlet air temperature, air
distribution, etc.) are not possible for
the rear air conditioner. For details,
refer to “Rear air conditioner” F4-9.
The automa tic climate control system
automatically controls outlet air tempera-
ture, fan speed, airflow distribution, air
inlet control, and air conditioner compres-
sor ope ration. It activates when the
“AUTO” button is pressed, and is used to
maintain a constant, comfortable climate
within the passenger compartment.
The temperature can be set within a range
of 65 to 858F (18 to 328C).
& Control panel
1) Temperature control dial (driver’s side)
2) Defroster button
3) Fan speed control dial
4) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Rear window defogger button” F3-37.)
5) Temperature control dial (passenger’s
side)
6) Air conditioner button
7) Airflow mode selection button
8) Air inlet selection button
9) OFF button
10) AUTO button
! AUTO button
AUTO mode operation:
When the “AUTO” button is pressed, the
indicator light on the button illuminates. In
this state, fan speed, airflow distribution,
air inlet control, and air conditioner com-
pressor operation are automatically con-
trolled.
Manual mode operation:
If you operate any of the buttons on the
control panel other than the “OFF” button
and temperature control dial during auto-
matic mode operation, the indicator light
will turn off. You can then manually control
the system as desired using the button
you operated.
To change the system back to the AUTO
mode, press the “AUTO” button.
Climate control 4-5
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (182,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4-6 Climate control
! OFF button
The Automatic Climate Control system
turns off (the air conditioner compressor
and fan turn off) when the “OFF” button is
pressed.
When the “OFF ” button is pressed, the
outside air introduction mode (air inlet
selection OFF) is automatically selected.
! Temperature control dial
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
It is possible to make separate tempera-
ture settings for the driver’ssideand
passenger’s side. Each temperature
setting is shown on the display. With the
dial set at your desired temperature, the
system automatically adjusts the tempera-
ture of air supplied from the outlets such
that the desired temperature is achieved
and maintained.
Turning the dial counterclockwise and
releasing it reduces the temperature by
18F (0.58C). Turning the dial clockwise
and releasing it increases the temperature
by 18F (0.58C). Holding the dial in either
turned position causes the temperature to
change continuously.
With the minimum temperature set, the
system gives maximum cooling perfor-
mance. With the maximum temperature
set, the system gives maximum heating
performance.
Black plate (183,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! – Defroster button
To defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows, push the defros-
ter button “
”. When the “ ” button is
pushed, the indicator light on the button
illuminates and the following operation is
performed.
. The outside ai r is d rawn in to the
passenger compartment and the airflow
is directed towards the windshield and the
front door windows.
. The air conditioner compressor auto-
matically operates to quickly defog the
windshield. However, the indicator light on
the air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate.
After eliminating the fogging from the
windshield, return the cli mate control
system to the AUTO mode by pushing
the “AUTO” button or turn off by pushing
the “OFF” button.
Alternatively, push the “
” button again
to return the system to the setting that was
selected before you activated the defros-
ter.
! Fan speed control dial
The fan speed control dial has 7 positions:
AUTO position and 6 different fan speed
positions.
The fan speed is shown on the center of
the dial.
With the fan speed control dial in the
AUTO position, the fan speed changes
automatically corresponding the various
conditions: air temperature inside and
outside of the passenger’s compartment,
intensity of the sunlight, etc.
! A/C – Air conditioner button
If the windshield starts to fog when the
climate control system is operated in the
AUTO mode, push the air conditioner
button to defog and dehumidify.
When this button is pushed , the ai r
conditioner compressor turns on and the
indicator light on the button illuminates.
After eliminating the f ogging from the
windshield, set the system back to the
AUTO mode by pushing the “AUTO”
button.
Climate control 4-7
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (184,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4-8 Climate control
NOTE
The air conditioner compressor may
not operate when the outside air tem-
perature is approximately 328F(08C) or
lower.
! Airflow mode selection button
Select the desired airflow mode by push-
ing the airflow mode selection button. The
selected airflow mode is shown on the
center of the dial.
There are five airflow modes that activate
the following air outlets.
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster out-
lets, foot outlets and both side outlets of
the instrument panel
: Windshield defroster outlets and both
side outlets of the instrument panel
For details, refer to “Airflow mode selec-
tion” F4-3.
NOTE
When the “ ” or “ ” mode is se-
lected, the air conditioner compressor
operates automatical ly to defog the
windshield more quickly, regardless of
the position of the ai r conditi oner
button. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to “out-
side air” mode.
! Air inlet selection button
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Push the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty ro ad. The
indicator light will illuminate.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Push the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty. The indicator light will
turn off.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
Black plate (185,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside dusty condition clears.
NOTE
When driving on a dusty road or behind
a vehicle that emits unpleasant exhaust
gases, set the air inlet selection button
to the ON position.
From time to time, return the air inlet
selection button to the OFF position to
draw outside air into the passenger
compartment.
& Rear air conditioner
The rear air conditioner blows cool air out
of the rear ventilators while the “A/C”
button on the control panel is in the “ON”
position. The fan speed of the rear air
conditioner can be adjusted using the rear
air conditioner dial behind the center
console. The fan speed can be adjusted
in four steps by turning the dial. Turn the
dial to the “OFF” position to stop the fan.
NOTE
. When the “A/C” button is in the
“OFF” position and when the “A/C”
indicator is not illuminated duri ng
AUTO mode operation, the air condi-
tioner compressor does not operate,
meaning that the system merely blows
uncooled air out of the ventilators.
. The outlet air temperature of the rear
air conditioner cannot be adjusted.
. The rear air conditioner cannot be
used as a heater.
& Temperature sensors
1) Interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
The automatic climate control system
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are treated incorrectly
and become damaged, the system may
not be able to control the interior tempera-
ture correctly. To avoid damaging the
sensors, observe the following precau-
tions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
Climate control 4-9
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (186,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4-10 Climate control
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows.
– Solar sensor: beside windshield
defroster grille
– Interior air temperature sensor: on the
side of the driver-side part of the center
panel
– Outside temperature sensor: behind
front grille
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilator grille
Always keep the front ventilator inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
allow outside air to circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
Black plate (187,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
od of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system
Replace the filter element according to the
replacement schedule shown in the fol-
lowing. This schedule should be followed
to maintain the filter’s dust collection
ability. Under extremely dusty conditions,
the filter should be replaced more fre-
quently. It is recommended that you have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, we
recommend the use of a genuine
SUBARU air filter kit.
Replacement schedule:
Every 15 months or 15,000 miles (24,000
km) whichever comes first
& Replacing the air filter
1. Remove the instrument panel side
cover.
NOTE
The instrument panel side cover is held
in place with four pins.
Climate control 4-11
– CONTINUED –
4
Black plate (188,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4-12 Climate control
2. Unhook the strap.
3. Remove the glove box by detaching
the one clip on the side.
4. Remove the air filter cover by detach-
ing the five clips.
5. Unhook the air filter and draw it out.
6. Replace the air filter with a new one.
7. Install the air filter cover.
8. Install the glove box.
9. Attach the strap to the hook.
Black plate (189,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
10. Secure the glove box with the one clip.
11. Install the instrument panel side cover.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter.
– Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
– Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
Climate control 4-13
4
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Antenna system .................................................. 5-2
Printed antenna................................................... 5-2
FM reception....................................................... 5-2
Installation of accessories.................................. 5-2
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Type A audio set ................................................. 5-3
Type B audio set ................................................. 5-3
Type A audio set (if equipped) ........................... 5-4
Radio operation................................................... 5-4
Compact disc player operation ........................... 5-10
Type B audio set (if equipped).......................... 5-15
Radio operation ................................................. 5-15
Built in CD changer operation ............................ 5-21
Audio control buttons ....................................... 5-26
MODE button..................................................... 5-26
Auxiliary input jack............................................ 5-28
Rear Seat Entertainm ent (RSE) system
operation (if equipped)................................... 5-29
Precautions to observe when handling a
compact disc................................................... 5-29
Audio
5
Black plate (192,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-2 Audio
Antenna system
& Printed antenna
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface of
the window on which the antenna is
printed. Doing so may damage the
antenna printed on the window.
The antenna is printed on the inner
surface of the rear window glass.
NOTE
Antenna performance will deteriorate
significantly if you apply tinting film or
any other material over the antenna
portion of the rear window glass.
& FM reception
Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the surround-
ing area, atmospheric conditions, station
strength and transmitter distance. Build-
ings or other obstructions may cause
momentary static, flutter or station inter-
ference. If reception continues to be
unsatisfactory, switch to a stronger station.
NOTE
If a cell phone is placed near the radio,
it may cause the radio to emit noise
when it receives calls. This noise does
not indicate a radio malfunction.
Installation of accessories
Always consu lt you r SUBAR U dea ler
before installing a citizen band radio or
other transmitting device in your vehicle.
Such devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if they are
incorrectly installed or if they are not
suited for the vehicle.
Black plate (193,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Audio set
Your SUBARU may be equipped with one
of the following audio sets. See the pages
indicated i n this section for operating
details.
& Type A audio set
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-4
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to page 5-10
& Type B audio set
. Radio operation: refer to page 5-15
. Built-in CD changer operation: refer to
page 5-21
Audio 5-3
5
Black plate (194,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-4 Audio
Type A audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” position.
& Radio operation
(1) Satellite radio mode button
(2) FM AM mode button
(3) Auxili ary audio unit and Rear seat
entertainment selection button
(4) Tuning button
(5) AUDIO button
(6) Power switch, volume control dial
(7) Seek button
(8) Scan button
(9) Tone and Balance button
(10) Preset button
! Power switch and volume control
The dial (6) is used for both power (ON/
OFF) and volume control. The radio is
turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial
and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial. The dial can also be used for tone
and balance adjustment.
! Tone and balance control
The volume control dial ( 6) normally
functions as a volume control. This dial
becomes a control for Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Fader or Balance when you select
the appropriate tone and balance control
mode.
Choose desired volume level for each
mode by turning the volume control dial.
The control function returns to volume
control mode after approximately 5 sec-
onds.
Black plate (195,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! To change tone and balance control
modes
Each brief press of the “TONE B AL”
button (9) changes control modes in the
following sequence starting from volume
control mode. (When the radio is first
turned on, the control mode is in the
volume control.)
The “ TONE B A L ” button is used for
selecting the following control modes.
Audio 5-5
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (196,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-6 Audio
Control mode (range of le-
vels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound
Fader control (R9 to F9)
To increase rear speaker vo-
lume and decrease front speak-
er volume
To increase front speaker vo-
lume and decrease rear speaker
volume
Balance control (L9 to R9)
To increase left speaker volume
and decrease right speaker vo-
lume
To increase right speaker vo-
lume and decrease left speaker
volume
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control* (0 to
40)
For less volume
For more volume
*: Only when an AUX audio product is connected.
! FM/AM radio
! FM/AM selection button
Push the “FM AM” button (2) when the
radio is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “FM AM” button when the radio
is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
! Manual tuning
Press the “
” side of the “TUNE TRACK”
button (4) to increase the tuning frequency
and press the “
” side of the button to
decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the
frequency interval can be changed be-
tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2
MHz in the FM mode.
If you hold down the “
” side of the
button, the tuning frequency will increase
continuously, and if you hold down the “
”
side of the button, the tuning frequency
will decrease continuously. Release the
button when your desired frequency is
reached.
Black plate (197,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
NOTE
While you are holding down either side
of the “TUNE TRACK” button, the
tuning frequency will not stop chan-
ging even if the frequency of a recei-
vable station is reached.
! Seek tuning
If you press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (7), the radio will
automatically search for a receivable
station and stop at the first one it finds.
This function may not be available, how-
ever, when radio signals are weak. In such
a situation, perform manual tuning to
select the desired station.
! Automatic tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
radio scans through the radio band until a
station is found. The radio will stop at the
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
frequency, after which scanning will con-
tinue until the enti re band has been
scanned from the low end to the high
end. Press the “SCAN” button again to
cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed frequency.
Press the “
” or “ ” side of the “SEEK
FLDR” button (7) again to cancel the scan
mode and to stop on any displayed
frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for
automatic tuning, stations are scanned in
the direction of low frequencies to high
frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
(10) allows you to select that station in a
single operation. Up to six, AM, FM1 and
FM2 stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM AM” button (2) to select
FM1, FM2, or AM reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tune
the radio manually until the desired station
frequency is displayed.
3. Press an d hold o ne of t he preset
buttons (10) to store the frequency. If the
button is pressed briefly, the preceding
selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cl eared. If thi s
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when it receives calls. This noise
does not indicate a radio malfunction.
! Satellite radio mode (if equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
install the SUBARU genuine satell ite
receiver (optional part) and to enter into
a contract with a satellite radio network
service such as “Sirius XM
TM
satellite
radio” (for U.S.A. only) or “Sirius satellite
radio” (for Canada only). For details,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
! Sirius satellite radio (for Canada
only)
Sirius satellite radio is a recent innovation
that allows the listene r to experien ce
digital sound quality and to have a greater
variety of channels.
Use of satellite radio (Sirius) requires a
tuner, antenna and a service contract. For
details, please contact yo ur SUBARU
dealer or visit Sirius Satellite Radio at
www.sirius.ca or call 1-888-539-7474 for
more information. Sirius, the Sirius dog
logo, channel names and logos are trade-
marks of SIRIUS Satellite Radio Inc.
Audio 5-7
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (198,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-8 Audio
! Sirius XM
TM
Satellite Radio Activa-
tion (for U.S.A. only)
Models with Sirius XM
TM
are eligible for a
3-mo nth complimentary subscription to
the Sirius XM
TM
Satellite Radio service.
Activation process:
You can activate the XM Satellite Radio
from the website of the XM Satellite Radio.
For details, visit the website.
! Satellite radio reception
Satellite radio signals are best received in
areas with a clear view of the open sky. In
areas where there are tall buildings, trees,
tunnels or other structures that may
obstruct the signal of the satellites, there
may be signal interruptions. Other circum-
stances that may result in signal loss
include driving near a wall, steep cliff or
hill, or driving on the lower level of a multi-
tiered road or inside a parking garage.
To help reduce this condition, satellite
rad io providers have installed ground-
based repeater s in hea vily populated
areas. However, you may still experience
reception problems in some areas.
! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by
its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to “0”.
Turn the “TUNE TRACK” button (4) to
select the satellite radio channel.
! Band selection button
Push the “SAT” button (1) when the radio
is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is
on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
tion.
! Channel selection
Press “
” of the “TUNE TRACK” button
(4) to select the next channel and press
“
” of the button to select the previous
channel.
Keep pressing “
” of the button to
change to the next channel continuously
and keep pressing “
” of the button to
change to the previous channel continu-
ously.
! Category selection
Press “
” or “ ” of the “SEEK FLDR”
button (7) to display the current category.
Press “
” again to select the next
category, and press “
” again to select
the previous category.
! Channel scan
Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
radio scans through the channels until a
station is found. The radio will stop at the
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
channel number, after which scanning will
continue until the entire channel has been
scanned from the low end to the high end.
Also during the category selection, chan-
nel scan can be performed in that cate-
gory.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
! Selecting preset channels
Presetting a channel with a preset button
(10) allows you to select that channel in a
single operation. Up to six, SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button (1) to select
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or the
“TUNE TRACK” button (4) to select the
channel.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons (10) to store the channel. If the
Black plate (199,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
button is pressed briefly, the preceding
selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and
battery is broken for any reason such
as vehicle maintenance or radio re-
moval, all channels stored in the preset
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reset the preset buttons.
! Display selection
Press the “AUDIO” button (5) while receiv-
ing satellite radio to change the display as
follows.
! Rear seat entertainment
If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear
Seat Entertainment System, you can
enjoy audio outputs from the system
through the vehicle’s speakers by press-
ing the “RSE AUX” button (3). Press the
button again to return to the audio set
sound.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear
Seat Entertainment System, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the
Rear Seat Entertainment System for
further details.
Audio 5-9
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (200,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-10 Audio
& Compact disc player operation
(1) CD button
(2) Track button
(3) AUDIO button
(4) Seek and Folder button
(5) Random button
(6) Repeat button
(7) Scan button
(8) Eject button
! To playback a compact disc
! When CD is not in the player
Hold a disc with a finger in the center hole
while gripping the edge of the disc, then
insert it in to the slot (with the label side
up) and the player will automatically pull
the disc into position.
NOTE
. DO NOT INSERT TWO DISCS INTO
THE DISC INSERTION SLOT AT THE
SAME TIME.
. Be sure to insert a disc with the label
side up. If you insert the disc the label
side down, “CHECK DISC” will appear
on the display and the player will not
play anything.
. After the last song finishes, the
player will automatically return to track
1 (the first song on the disc).
Black plate (201,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. If you insert a disc that cannot be
played by the player, “CHECK DISC ”
will appear on the display and the
player will revert to the previously
selected mode.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not
supported, and if inserted, they will be
immediately ejected.
! When CD is in the player
When the “CD” button (1) is pressed, the
player will start playback.
NOTE
After the last song finishes, the player
will automatically return to track 1 (the
first song on the disc).
! To stop playback of a CD
When the “PUSH POWER” button is
pressed during playback of a CD, the CD
stops playing temporarily. To let the CD
resume playing, press the button again.
! To select a song from its beginning
! Forward direction
Briefly press the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning
of the next track. Each time this side of the
button is pressed, the indicated track
number will increase.
NOTE
In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last
track will take you back to the first track
in the folder.
! Backward direction
Briefly press the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning
of the current track. Each time this side of
the button is pressed, the indicated track
number will decrease.
NOTE
In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last
track will take you back to the first track
in the folder.
! Fast-forwarding and rewinding
! Fast-forwarding
Press and hold the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to fast-forward the
track.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward past the last track
on the disc, the player will select the
first track on the disc and start playing
it.
! Rewinding
Press and hold the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to rewind the track.
Release the button to stop rewinding.
NOTE
If you rewind to the beginning of the
first track on the disc, the rewinding
will stop and the player will start
playing the first track on the disc.
! Folder selection (MP3 disc)
Press the “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”
button (4) briefly to select the next folder.
Pressing the “
” side of the same button
the first time makes the player go back to
the beginning of the currently selected
track; pressing it a second time makes it
go back to the previously selected track.
NOTE
Only MP3 folders are recognized when
an attempt to select the next or pre-
vious folder is made. If no appropriate
folder exists on the disc, pressing the
“
” or “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”
button has no effect.
Audio 5-11
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (202,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-12 Audio
! Repeating
! To repeat the currently playing track
To repeat a track, briefly press the “RPT”
button (6) while the track is playing. The
display will show “RPT”, and the track will
be repeated.
To cancel the track repeat-play mode:
Press the “RPT” button once (non-MP3
disc)
Press the “RPT” button twice (MP3 disc)
The “RPT” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
. With an MP3 disc inserted, each
time you briefly press the button, the
mode will change to the next one in the
following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and
cancel the t rack repeat-play mode,
press it again to reselect the repeat-
play mode.
. The repeat-play mode will be can-
celed if you perform any of the follow-
ing steps.
– Press the “RDM” button.
– Press the “SCAN” button.
– Press the “
” button.
– Select the radio mode.
– Press the “RSE AUX” button.
– Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! To repeat the currently playing folder
(MP3 disc)
To repeat the cu rrently p laying folder,
press the “RPT” button (6) twice while a
track is playing. The display will show “F-
RPT”, and the folder will be played
repeatedly.
To cancel the folder repeat-play mode,
press the “RPT” button once more. The
“F-RPT” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
. Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and
cancel the folder repeat- play mode,
press it again to reselect the folder
repeat-play mode.
. The folder repeat-play mode will be
cancelled if you perform any of the
following steps.
– Press the “RDM” button.
– Press the “SCAN” button.
– Press the “
” button.
– Select the radio mode.
– Press the “RSE AUX” button.
– Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! Random playback
! Non-MP3 disc
Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly during
disc playback to play all of the tracks on
the disc in a random order. The display will
show “RDM”, and all of the tracks on the
disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel random mode, press the button
again. The “RDM” indication will turn off,
and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT” button.
Black plate (203,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. Press the “SCAN” button.
. Press the “
” button.
. Select the radio mode.
. Press the “RSE AUX” button.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! MP3 disc
Press the “RDM” button (5) during disc
playback to play all of the tracks in the
folder currently being played in random
order. Press the “RDM” button again to
play all of the tracks on the disc in random
order. The display will show “RDM” during
the random mode.
To cancel the random mode, press the
“RDM” button during “in-disc” random
playback. The “RDM” indication will turn
off, and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
NOTE
. Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and
cancel the random mode, press it again
to reselect the random mode.
. Random playback will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps.
– Press the “RPT” button.
– Press the “SCAN” button.
– Press the “ ” button.
– Select the radio mode.
– Press the “RSE AUX” button.
– Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button.
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! Scan
The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track on the disc/
folder in succession. Press the “SCAN”
button (7) to start scanning through all
tracks upward beginning with the track
following the currently selected one. After
all tracks on the disc/folder has been
scanned, normal playback mode is re-
stored.
To cancel a scan, press the button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following opera-
tions.
. Press the “RPT” button.
. Press the “RDM” button.
. Press the “
” button.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“TUNE TRACK” button.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).
. Select the radio mode.
. Press the “RSE AUX” button.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turntheignitionswitchtothe
“LOCK” position.
! To eject a disc from the player
When a disc is being played back or when
a disc is in the player, press the “
”
button (8). The disc will be ejected.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If the disc is left ejected for more
Audio 5-13
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (204,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-14 Audio
than approximately 15 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position, a disc protection
function will operate, automatically
reloading the disc. In this case, the
disc is not played.
! Display selection (MP3 disc)
If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) during
playback, the indication will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
! Page (track/folder title) scroll (MP3
disc)
If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)
to select track title or folder title display,
you press the “AUDIO” button again for
less than 0.5 second, the title will be
scrolled so you can see all of it. You will
see eight characters at a time.
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles
for up to three pages (64 characters in
total).
Black plate (205,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Type B audio set (if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the ignition switch is in the “Acc” or “ON” positions.
& Radio operation
(1) Satellite radio mode button
(2) FM AM mode button
(3) Auxili ary audio unit and Rear seat
entertainment selection button
(4) Tuning button
(5) AUDIO button
(6) Power switch, volume control dial
(7) Seek button
(8) Scan button
(9) Tone and Balance button
(10) Preset button
! Power switch and volume control
The dial (6) is used for both power (ON/
OFF) and volume control. The radio is
turned ON and OFF by pushing the dial
and the volume is controlled by turning the
dial. The dial can also be used for tone
and balance adjustment.
! Tone and balance control
The volume control dial ( 6) normally
functions as a volume control. This dial
becomes a control for Bass, Midrange,
Treble, Fader or Balance when you select
the appropriate tone and balance control
mode.
Choose desired volume level for each
mode by turning the volume control dial.
The control function returns to volume
control mode after approximately 5 sec-
onds.
Audio 5-15
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (206,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-16 Audio
! To change tone and balance control
modes
Each brief press of the “TONE BAL”
button (9) changes control modes in the
following sequence starting from volume
control mode. (When the radio is first
turned on, the control mode is in the
volume control.)
The “ TONE B A L ” button is used for
selecting the following control modes.
Black plate (207,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Control mode (Range of le-
vels)
Turn counterclockwise Turn clockwise
Bass control (−6 to +6) For less bass sound For more bass sound
Midrange control (−6 to +6) For less midrange sound For more midrange sound
Treble control (−6 to +6) For less treble sound For more treble sound
Fader control (R9 to F9)
To increase rear speaker vo-
lume and decrease front
speaker volume
To increase front speaker vo-
lume and decrease rear speaker
volume
Balance control (L9 to R9)
To increase left speaker volume
and decrease right speaker vo-
lume
To increase right speaker vo-
lume and decrease left speaker
volume
Volume control (0 to 40) For less volume For more volume
AUX volume control* (0 to
40)
For less volume
For more volume
*: Only when an AUX audio product is connected.
! FM/AM radio
! FM/AM selection button
Push the “FM AM” button (2) when the
radio is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “FM AM” button when the radio
is on to select FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
! Stereo indicator
The stereo indicator “ST” will illuminate
when an FM stereo broadcast is received.
! Manual tuning
Press the “
” side of the “TUNE TRACK”
button (4) to increase the tuning frequency
and press the tuning button marked “
” to
decrease it.
Each time the button is pressed, the
frequency interval can be changed be-
tween 10 kHz in the AM mode and 0.2
MHz in the FM mode.
If you hold down the “
” side of the
button, the tuning frequency will increase
continuously, and if you hold down the “
”
side of the button, the tuning frequency
will decrease continuously. Release the
button when your desired frequency is
reached.
Audio 5-17
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (208,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-18 Audio
NOTE
While you are holding down either side
of the TUNE/TRACK button, the tuning
frequency will not stop changing even
if the frequency of a receivable station
is reached.
! Seek tuning (SEEK)
If you press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (7), the radio will
automatically search for a receivable
station and stop at the first one it finds.
This function may not be available, how-
ever, when radio signals are weak. In such
a situation, perform manual tuning to
select the desired station.
! Scan tuning (SCAN)
Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
radio scans through the radio band until a
station is found. The radio will stop at the
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
frequency, after which scanning will con-
tinue until the enti re band has been
scanned from the low end to the high
end. Press the “SCAN” button again to
cancel the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed frequency.
Press the “
” or “ ” side of the “SEEK
FLDR” button (7) again to cancel the scan
mode and to stop on any displayed
frequency.
When the “SCAN” button is pressed for
automatic tuning, stations are scanned in
the direction of low frequencies to high
frequencies only.
Automatic tuning may not function prop-
erly if the station reception is weakened by
distance from the station or proximity to
tall buildings and hills.
! Selecting preset stations
Presetting a station with a preset button
allows you to select that station in a single
operation. Up to six AM, FM1 and FM2
stations each may be preset.
! How to preset stations
1. Press the “FM AM” button (2) to select
FM1, FM2 or AM reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or tune
the radio manually until the desired station
frequency is displayed.
3. Press an d hold o ne of t he preset
buttons to store the frequency. If the
button is pressed briefly, the preceding
selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
. If the connection between the radio
and battery is broken for any reason
such as vehicle maintenance or radio
removal, all stations stored in the
preset buttons are cl eared. If thi s
occurs, it is necessary to reset the
preset buttons.
. If a cell phone is placed near the
radio, it may cause the radio to emit
noise when it receives calls. This noise
does not indicate a radio malfunction.
! Satellite radio mode (if equipped)
To receive satellite radio, it is necessary to
install the SUBARU genuine satell ite
receiver (optional part) and to enter into
a contract with a satellite radio network
service such as “Sirius XM
TM
satellite
radio” (for U.S.A. only) or “Sirius satellite
radio” (for Canada only). For details,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
! Sirius satellite radio (for Canada
only)
Refer to “Sirius satellite radio (for Canada
only)” F5-7.
! Sirius XM
TM
Satellite Radio Activa-
tion (for U.S.A. only)
Refer to “Sirius XM
TM
Satellite Radio
Activation (for U.S.A. only)” F5-8.
! Satellite radio reception
Refer to “Satellite radio reception” F5-8.
! Displaying satellite radio ID of tuner
When you activate satellite radio, you
Black plate (209,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
should have your satellite radio tuner ID
ready because each tuner is identified by
its unique satellite radio tuner ID.
The satellite radio ID will be needed when
you activate satellite radio and receive
satellite radio customer support.
The satellite radio ID can be found on the
audio display by tuning the channel to “0” .
Turn the “TUNE/TRACK” button (4) to
select the satellite radio channel.
! Band selection button
Push the “SAT” button (1) when the radio
is off to turn on the radio.
Push the “ SAT” button when the radio is
on to select SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3 recep-
tion.
! Channel selection
Press “
” of the “TUNE TRACK” button
(4) to select the next channel and press
“
” of the button to select the previous
channel.
Keep pressing “
” of the but ton to
change to the next channel continuously
and keep pressing “
” of the button to
change to the previous channel continu-
ously.
! Category selection
Press “
” or “ ” of the “SEEK FLDR”
button (7) to display the current category.
Press “
” again to select the next
category, and press “
” again to select
the previous category.
! Channel scan
Press the “SCAN” button (8) to change the
radio to the SCAN mode. In this mode, the
radio scans through the channels until a
station is found. The radio will stop at the
station for 5 seconds while displaying the
channel number, after which scanning will
continue until the entire channel has been
scanned from the low end to the high end.
Also during the category selection, chan-
nel scan can be performed in that cate-
gory.
Press the “SCAN” button again to cancel
the SCAN mode and to stop on any
displayed channel.
! Selecting preset channels
Presetting a channel with a preset button
(10) allows you to select that channel in a
single operation. Up to six, SAT1, SAT2
and SAT3 channels each may be preset.
! How to preset channels
1. Press the “SAT” button (1) to select
SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3 reception.
2. Press the “SCAN” button (8) or the
“TUNE TRACK” button (4) to select the
channel.
3. Press and hold one of the preset
buttons (10) to store the channel. If the
button is pressed briefly, the preceding
selection will remain in memory.
NOTE
If the connection between the radio and
battery is broken for any reason such
as vehicle maintenance or radio re-
moval, all channels stored in the preset
buttons are cleared. If this occurs, it is
necessary to reset the preset buttons.
! Display selection
Press the “AUDIO” button (5) while receiv-
ing satellite radio to change the display as
follows.
! Rear seat entertainment
If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear
Seat Entertainment System, you can
enjoy audio outputs from the system
through the vehicle’s speakers by press-
ing the “RSE AUX” button (3). Press the
button again to return to the audio set
sound.
Audio 5-19
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (210,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-20 Audio
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a Rear
Seat Entertainment System, refer to the
Owner’s Manual supplement for the
Rear Seat Entertainment System for
further details.
Black plate (211,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Built in CD changer operation
(1) CD button
(2) Track button
(3) AUDIO button
(4) Seek and Folder button
(5) Random button
(6) Repeat button
(7) Scan button
(8) Eject button
(9) Disc select button
(10) Load button
NOTE
. Be sure to insert a disc with the label
side up. If you insert the disc the label
side down, “CHECK DISC” will appear
on the display and the player will not
play anything.
. If a disc is inserted during a radio
broadcast, the disc will interrupt the
broadcast.
. The player is designed to be able to
play music CD-Rs and music CD-RWs,
but it may not be able to play certain
ones.
. CDs (i.e., 8 cm/3 inch CDs) are not
supported, and if inserted, they will be
immediately ejected.
. Insert discs slowly, one at a time.
Inserting discs one over another could
result in malfunction of the CD chan-
ger.
Audio 5-21
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (212,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-22 Audio
! How to insert a CD(s)
! Inserting a CD
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). If
the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
If no indicator blinks, it means that there is
no idle position in the magazine.
2. After the disc number indicator has
started to flash, insert the disc when
“LOAD” flashes on the display. The disc
will then be automatically drawn in, and
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the disc.
. To insert more discs in succession,
repeat Steps 1 and 2. The magazine will
be loaded with discs in the ascending
order of position number.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. The disc indicator steadily lights up if a
disc is already inserted in the correspond-
ing position of the magazine.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press “FM AM” button, the player will
enter the standby mode. Press the “CD”
button (1) to start playback.
! Inserting a disc in a desired position
1. Briefly press the “LOAD” button (10). If
the magazine in the player has an idle
position where you can insert a disc, the
disc number indicator associated with the
idle position will blink.
The positions in the magazine the indica-
tor of which steadily lights up are already
loaded with discs.
2. Press the disc select button (9) at the
position where you want to insert a disc.
3. Insert the disc when “LOAD ” flashes
on the display. The disc will then be
automatically drawn in, and the player will
begin to play the first track on the disc.
. If you wish to insert another disc,
repeat the procedure beginning with step
1.
If you do not insert any disc in 15 seconds
after you have pressed the “LOAD” button,
the player will begin to play back the first
track of the last disc you have inserted.
. While the player is in the loading mode,
if you press “FM AM” button, the player will
enter standby mod e. Press the “CD”
button (1) to start playback.
! Loading all the magazine (full disc
loading mode)
1. If you press and hold the “LOAD”
button (10), the player will produce a beep
sound and will enter the full disc loading
mode.
2. A “disc number” indicator will blink,
and “ALL LOAD” will be on display for a
period of 15 seconds. If a disc is success-
fully loaded during this period, the disc
number indicator will stop blinking and will
steadily light.
3. When the loading of a disc is com-
plete, the next disc number indicator will
blink. Then repeat Step 2.
4. When the magazine is filled with discs
by repeating Steps 2 and 3, the player will
start playback of the discs, beginning with
the one inserted first.
If you fail to insert any disc during each 15
seconds interval, the full disc loading
mode will be canceled, and the player will
start playback of the disc inserted first.
! How to play back a CD or make a
pause
! When there is no CD inserted:
Properly insert a CD. Refer to “How to
insert a CD(s)” F5-22.
When a CD is loaded, the player will start
playback of the CD, beginning with the
first track.
Black plate (213,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! When there are CDs loaded:
Press the preferred disc select button (9),
the disc number indicator of which is
constantly illuminated. The player will then
start playback of the selected CD, begin-
ning with the first track.
If a disc that the player cannot read has
been loaded, “CHECK DISC” will appear
on the display and the player will not play
anything.
! To select a song from its beginning
! Forward direction
Briefly press the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning
of the next track. Each time the button is
pressed, the indicated track number will
increase.
NOTE
In an MP3 folder, skipping past the last
track will take you back to the first track
in the folder.
! Backward direction
Briefly press the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to skip to the beginning
of the current track. Each time the button
is pressed, the indicated track number will
decrease.
NOTE
In an MP3 folder, skipping past the first
track will take you to the last track in
the folder.
! Fast-forwarding and rewinding
! Fast-forwarding
Press and hold the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to fast-forward the
track.
Release the button to stop fast-forwarding.
NOTE
If you fast-forward to the end of the last
track, fast-forwarding will stop and the
player w ill start playback beginning
with the first track.
! Rewinding
Press and hold the “
” side of the “TUNE
TRACK” button (2) to rewind the track.
Release the button to stop rewinding.
NOTE
If you rewind to the beginning of the
first track, the rewinding will stop and
the player will start playback.
! Repeating
! To repeat the currently playing track
To repeat a track, briefly press the “RPT”
button (6) while the track is playing. The
display will show “RPT”, and the track will
be repeated.
To cancel the track repeat-play mode,
briefly press the “RPT” button twice. The
“RPT” indication will turn off, and the
normal playback mode will be resumed.
NOTE
. Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and
cancel the track repeat-play mode,
press it again to reselect the repeat-
play mode.
. The repeat-play mode will be can-
celled if you perform any of the follow-
ing steps.
– Press the “RDM” button.
– Press the “SCAN” button.
– Press the “
” button.
– Press the disc select button.
– Select the radio mode.
– Press the “RSE AUX” button.
Audio 5-23
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (214,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-24 Audio
– Press the “ ” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! To repeat the currently playing disc/
folder
To repeat the currently playing disc/folder,
press the “RPT” button (6) twice while a
track is playing. The display will show “D-
RPT”, and the disc/folder will be played
repeatedly.
To cancel the disc/folder repeat-play
mode, press the “RPT” button once more.
The “D-RPT” indication will turn off, and
the normal playback mode will be re-
sumed.
NOTE
. Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
If you accidentally press the button and
cancel the disc/folde r repeat-play
mode, press it again to reselect the
disc/folder repeat-play mode.
. The disc/folder repeat-play mode
will be cancelled if you perform any of
the following steps.
– Press the “RDM” button.
– Press the “SCAN” button.
– Press the “
” button.
– Press the disc select button.
– Select the radio mode.
– Press the “RSE AUX” button.
– Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! Random playback
! Non-MP3 disc
Press the “RDM” button (5) briefly during
disc playback to play all of the tracks on
the disc in a random order. The display will
show “RDM”, and all of the tracks on the
disc will be played in a random order.
To cancel random mode, press the button
again. The “RDM” indication will turn off,
and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
NOTE
Random playback will be cancelled if
you perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT” button.
. Press the “SCAN” button.
. Press the “
” button.
. Select the radio mode.
. Press the “RSE AUX” button.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turntheignitionswitchtothe
“LOCK” position.
! MP3 disc
Press the “RDM” button (5) during disc
playback to play all of the tracks in the
folder currently being played in random
order. Press the “RDM” button again to
play all of the tracks on the disc in random
order. The display will show “RDM” during
the random mode.
To cancel the random mode, press the
“RDM” button during “in-disc” random
playback. The “RDM” indication will turn
off, and the normal playback mode will be
resumed.
NOTE
. Each time you briefly press the
button, the mode will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
Black plate (215,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
If you accidentally press the button and
cancel the random mode, press it again
to reselect the random mode.
. Random playback will be cancelled
if you perform any of the following
steps.
– Press the “RPT” button.
– Press the “SCAN” button.
– Press the “
” button.
– Select the radio mode.
– Press the “RSE AUX” button.
– Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button.
– Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
– Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! SCAN
The scan mode lets you listen to the first
10 seconds of each track in succession.
Press the “SCAN” button (7) to start
scanning upward beginning with the track
following the currently selected one. When
all tracks in the disc/folder have been
scanned, normal playb ack wil l be re-
sumed. To cancel the scan mode, press
the button again.
NOTE
The scan mode will be cancelled if you
perform any of the following steps.
. Press the “RPT” button.
. Press the “RDM” button.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“TUNE TRACK” button.
. Press the “
” or “ ” side of the
“SEEK FLDR” button (MP3 disc).
. Press the “
” button.
. Press the disc select button.
. Select the radio mode.
. Press the “RSE AUX” button.
. Turn off the power of the audio
equipment.
. Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position.
! Display selection (MP3 disc)
If you press the “AUDIO” button (3) during
playback, the indication will change to the
next one in the following sequence.
! Page (track/folder title) scroll (MP3
disc)
If, having pressed the “AUDIO” button (3)
to select track title or folder title display,
you press the “AUDIO” button again for
less than 0.5 second, the title will be
scrolled so you can see all of it. You will
see eight characters at a time.
NOTE
The display is designed to show titles
for up to three pages (64 characters in
total).
! Folder selection (MP3 disc)
Press the “
” side of the “SEEK FLDR”
button (4) briefly to select the next folder.
Pressing the “
” side of the same button
the first time makes the player go back to
the beginning of the currently selected
track; pressing it a second time makes it
go back to the previously selected track.
NOTE
Only MP3 folders are recognized when
an attempt to select the next or pre-
vious folder is made. If no appropriate
folder exists on the disc, pressing the
“
” or “ ” side of the “SEEK FLDR”
button has no effect.
Audio 5-25
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (216,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-26 Audio
! How to unload CDs from the player
! Ejecting a CD from the player
Of the discs loaded, you can select and
remove only one disc.
1. Use the disc select button (9) to select
the disc to be ejected.
2. Briefly press the “
” button (8). The
selected disc will be ejected. The disc
number indicator will flash at this time.
When you remove the ejected disc, the
disc number indicator will turn off.
To remove more discs in succession,
repeat Steps 1 and 2.
! Ejecting all discs from the player (all
disc ejection mode)
1. If you press and hold the “
” button
(8), the player will produce a beep sound
and will enter the all disc ejection mode.
2. Remove the disc t hat has been
ejected. The other discs loaded will then
be ejected one after another. If you do not
remove the disc that has been ejected, the
“All disc ejection mode” will be canceled.
NOTE
. Avoid driving the vehicle with a CD
sticking out, because vibration might
make it fall out.
. If you press the “
” button while
the player is in all disc ejection mode,
the mode will be cancelled following
ejection of the disc that is currently
being ejected.
. If you press the “CD” button while
the player is in all disc ejection mode,
the player will draw in the discs that
have been ejected and play them.
Audio control buttons
These buttons are located on the spokes
of the steering wheel. They allow the
driver to control audio functions without
taking his/her hands off the steering
wheel.
& MODE button
This button is used to select the desired
audio mode. Each time it is pressed, the
mode changes to the next one in the
following sequence.
*1: The frequency last received in the selected
Black plate (217,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
waveband will be displayed.
*2: Only when a CD is in the player.
*3: Only vehicle equipped with RSE (Rear Seat
Entertainment)
! “ ” and “ ” buttons
! With radio mode selected
Press the “
” button to select the next
channel and press the “
” button to select
the previous channel.
That station’s frequency will be shown on
the audio display.
! With CD mode selected
Press the “
” button to skip forward in the
track order. Pressing the “
” button the
first time makes the player go back to the
beginning of the current track; pressing it
the second time makes it go back to the
previous track.
The track number will be shown on the
audio display.
! Volume control buttons
Press the “+” button to increase t he
volume. Press the “−” button to reduce
the volume.
A number indicating the volume will be
shown on the audio display.
! MUTE button
Press this button if you wish to immedi-
ately cut the volume to zero.
The audio display will show “MUTE”.
If you press the button again, the original
sound volume will return and “MUTE”
turns off.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with a
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
the display will show “
”.
Audio 5-27
5
Black plate (218,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-28 Audio
Auxiliary input jack
You can connect an external audio device
to the vehicle’s audio system and play
back audio via the vehicle’s speakers.
An auxiliary (AUX) input jack is equipped
in the lower compartment of the center
console. A stereo mini pin plug (3.5ø) can
be inserted in this jack. The connection
cable is available at electrical appliance or
similar stores.
To use the AUX input jack:
1. Connect a portable audio player to the
AUX input jack.
2. Press the “RSE AUX” button on the
audio control panel to turn on the auxiliary
audio input.
3. Play back the portable audio player.
Refer to the Owner’s M anual for the
portable audio player.
NOTE
. The output sound of the portable
audio player is not loud, and the sound
via the vehicl e’s speakers that a re
connected to the vehicle audio set
may be very low. If you turn up the
volume of the audio set, the volume
becomes louder. However, when you
change from one portable audio player
to another one, the volume levels via
the vehicle’s speakers may be signifi-
cantly louder compared to the prior
device. To avoid a large volume differ-
ence, turn down the volume when you
change between portable audio
players.
. In some cases, when the sound
volume of the portable audio player is
low, the sound becomes bad when you
turn up the volume of the vehicle audio
system. In this case, adjust the sound
volume of the portable audio player.
. In some cases, noise occurs be-
cause of a bad connection between the
portable player and the vehicle audio
system. Try cleaning the stereo jack
and audio plug.
. If noise is not reduced, check for
disconnection of the cord or malfunc-
tions of the portable player.
Black plate (219,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system operation (if
equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, you
can listen to the audio via the vehicle
speakers. Push the “RSE AUX” button to
play a DVD using the Rear Seat Entertain-
ment system.
For detailed operating procedures, refer to
the Owner’s Manual supplement for the
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system.
NOTE
. To watch a DVD in the front seats
using the monitor of the navigation
system, park the vehicle in a safe
location and apply the parking brake.
Images of the DVD will not be displayed
on the front monitor unless the parking
brake is applied.
. The harman/kardon
®
audio system
is a stereo system with 2 channels. If a
harman/kardon
®
audio system is
equipped, the Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system m ay not generate a
satisfying realistic sound when playing
5.1 channel audio sources.
Precautions to observe when
handling a compact disc
Use only compact discs (CDs, CD-Rs and
CD-RWs) that have the mark shown in the
following illustration. Also, some compact
discs cannot be played.
Audio 5-29
– CONTINUED –
5
Black plate (220,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
5-30 Audio
. You cannot use a DualDisc in the CD
player. If you insert a DualDisc into the
player, the disc may not come out again,
possibly causing the player to malfunction.
. In cold and/or rainy weather, dew can
form inside the CD player, preventing
normal operation. If this happens, eject
the CD and wait for the player to dry out.
. Skipping may occur when the CD
player is subjected to severe vibration
(for example, when the vehicle is driven
on a rough surface).
. To remove a disc from the case, press
the center of the case and hold both
edges of the disc. If the disc surface is
touched directly, contamination could
cause poor tone quality. Do not touch the
disc surface.
. Use a clean disc whenever possible. If
there are deposits, wipe the disc surface
from the center outward with a dry, soft
cloth. Be sure not to use a hard cloth,
thinner, benzine, alcohol, etc.
. Do not use any disc that is scratched,
deformed, or cracked. Also, do not use
any disc that has a non-standard shape
(for example, a heart shape). Malfunctions
or problems might result.
. A disc is vulnerable to heat. Never
keep it either in places exposed to direct
sunlight, near heaters or i n vehicles
parked in the sun or on hot days.
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Interior light ......................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Cargo area light .................................................. 6-3
Rear gate light .................................................... 6-3
Map light............................................................. 6-3
Automatic ambient light for center console area
(if equipped)...................................................... 6-4
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4
Sun visor extension plate .................................... 6-5
Vanity mirror with light ........................................ 6-5
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-6
Glove box ........................................................... 6-6
Center console box ............................................. 6-6
Rear console....................................................... 6-7
Overhead console ............................................... 6-8
Cup holder........................................................... 6-8
Front passenger’s cup holder .............................. 6-8
Second-row seat cup holders .............................. 6-9
Third-row seat cup holders .................................. 6-9
Bottle holders...................................................... 6-9
Accessory power outlets ................................... 6-10
Coat hook ........................................................... 6-12
Shopping bag hook............................................ 6-13
Floor mat............................................................ 6-13
Cargo area cover (if equipped)......................... 6-14
Using the cover ................................................. 6-14
To remove the cover .......................................... 6-15
To install the cover housing ............................... 6-15
Convenient tie-down hooks .............................. 6-16
Under-floor storage compartment .................... 6-16
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System (if
equipped) ........................................................ 6-17
Garage door opener programming in the
U.S.A............................................................... 6-18
Programming rolling-code-protected garage door
openers in the U.S.A. ....................................... 6-19
Programming for entrance gates and garage door
openers in Canada........................................... 6-20
Programming other devices ............................... 6-21
Operating the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System............................................................ 6-21
Erasing HomeLink
®
button memory .................... 6-21
In case a problem occurs................................... 6-21
Rear view camera (if equipped)........................ 6-21
How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-22
Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-23
Help line............................................................ 6-24
Interior equipment
6
Black plate (224,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-2 Interior equipment
Interior light
When leaving your vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
& Dome light
Models with Rear Seat Entertainment
Models without Rear Seat Entertainment
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
three positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
opened.
. The doors or the rear gate are un-
locked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated dome light
remains on for several seconds and then
gradually turns off after all doors and the
rear gate are closed. While the light is
illuminated, if any of the following opera-
tions are performed, the dome light turns
off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to “Acc” or “ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the light
remains on (OFF delay timer) can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Black plate (225,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Cargo area light
1) DOOR
2) OFF
3) ON
The cargo area lig ht s witch has the
following three positions.
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and turns off
after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
& Rear gate light
The rear gate light is located inside the
vehicle on the rear gate. Push the right
side of the switch to turn it on, and push
the left side of the switch to turn it off.
& Map light
To turn on the map light, push the switch.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
When leaving the vehicle, make sure the
lights are turned off to avoid battery
discharge.
Although the map light switches are in the
OFF position, the map lights illuminate
automatically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate is
opened.
– The operational/non-operational
setting of this function can be changed
by a SUBARU dealer. Contact your
SUBARU dealer to change the setting.
– The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”
Interior equipment 6-3
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (226,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-4 Interior equipment
(automatic illumination - ON).
. The door s are unl ocked us ing the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“Acc” position to the “LOCK” position.
The automatically illuminated map lights
remain illuminated for several seconds
and then gradually turn off after all doors
are closed.
While the lights are illuminated, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the map lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK” position to the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
. All doors and the rear gate are locked
using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The setting of the period for which the light
remains illuminated (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for details.
NOTE
If any of the doors or the rear gate is
not completely closed, the map lights
will remain illuminated as a result.
However, the map lights are automati-
cally turned off by the battery drainage
prevention function to prevent t he
battery from discharging. For details,
refer to “Battery drainage prevention
function” F2-6.
& Automatic ambient light for
center console area (if
equipped)
The automatic ambient light illuminates
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position and the light control switch is in
the “
” position or “ ” position. The
light dimly illuminates the area around the
center console. The light turns off when
the light control switch is in the “OFF”
position. Also, the brightness of the light is
adjusted by the illumination brightness
control dial.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
Black plate (227,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Sun visor extension plate
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, y ou can use the sun visor
extension plate to prevent glare through
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
would obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity mirror with light
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being temporarily blinded by the
glare of bright light.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-
nates when the mirror cover is opened.
NOTE
Use of the vanity mirror light for a long
period of time while the engine is not
running can cause battery discharge.
Interior equipment 6-5
6
Black plate (228,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-6 Interior equipment
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of sudden stops o r an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
& Center console box
The center console box has a two-layer
structure consisting of an upper compart-
ment and a lower compartment.
Black plate (229,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! Upper compartment
1) Upper compartment lock release
Pull up the upper compartment lock
release to open the upper compartment.
! Lower compartment
1) Lower compartment lock release
Pull up the l ower comp artment lock
release to open the lower compartment.
& Rear console
The rear console is located in the back of
the center console box. Pull it out to use it.
Interior equipment 6-7
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (230,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-8 Interior equipment
& Overhead console
To open the console, push on the lid lightly
and it will automatically open.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is parked in the
sun or on a warm day, the inside of
the overhead console heats up.
Avoid storing plastic or other heat-
vulnerable or flammable articles
such as a lighter in the overhead
console.
Cup holder
CAUTION
Take care to avoid spills. Beverages,
if hot, might burn you and/or your
passengers. Spilled beverages may
also damage upholstery or carpets.
& Front passenger’s cup holder
CAUTION
Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an accident.
The dual cup holder is built into the center
console near the select lever.
To access the cup hol der, push the
release button.
Black plate (231,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Second-row seat cup holders
A dual cup holder is built in the armrest.
CAUTION
When a cup containing a beverage
is in the cup holder, do not slide or
recline any seat. Otherwise, the
beverage could spill while driving
and, if the beverage is hot, it could
burn you and/or your passengers.
& Third-row seat cup holders
A cup holder is located at each side of the
third-row seat.
CAUTION
When placing a beverage in a cup
holder, make sure it is capped.
Otherwise, the beverage could spill
while driving and, if the beverage is
hot, it could burn you and/or your
passengers.
Bottle holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
door pocket, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could burn
you and/or your passengers.
The door pocket equipped on each door
Interior equipment 6-9
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (232,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-10 Interior equipment
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlets in the center console
Power outlets in the rear cabin
Accessory power outlets are provided in
the center console (lower compartment)
and in the rear cabin.
Electrical power (12V DC) from the battery
is available at any of the outlets when the
ignition switch is in either the “Acc” or “ON”
position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is shown in
the following list. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wattage for
each outlet.
. The two outlets in the center console:
120W or less (When using appliances
connected to two outlets simultaneously,
the total power consumed by them must
not exceed 120W.)
. The two outlets in the rear cabin: 120W
or less (When using appliances con-
nected to two outlets simultaneously, the
total power consumed by them must not
exceed 120W.)
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
Black plate (233,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electri cal appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
appliance that can be connected
is shown in the following list. Do
not use an appliance which ex-
ceeds the indicated wattage for
each outlet.
– The two outlets in the center
console: 120W or less (When
using appliances connected
to two outlets simultaneously,
the total power consumed by
them must not exceed 120W.)
– The two outlets in the rear
cabin: 12 0W or l ess (When
using appliances connected
to two outlets simultaneously,
the total power consumed by
them must not exceed 120W.)
Overloading the accessory
power outlet can cause a short
circuit. Do not use dual adapters
or more than one electrical appli-
ance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel-
erator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
NOTE
It is possible, when using the outlet in
the center console (lower compart-
ment) with the lid closed, to pass the
electrical appliance’s cord through a
gap between the center console (lower
Interior equipment 6-11
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (234,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-12 Interior equipment
compartment) and the lid. It is also
possible to pass the cord through a
groove in the lid and up to the center
console (upper compartment).
Coat hook
A coat hook is attached to each hand grip
for the outboard second-row passenger’s
seats.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing correct airbag deploy-
ment. Before hanging clothing on
the coat hooks, make sure there are
no pointed objects in the pockets.
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision. And
do not hang items on the coat hook
that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or more.
Black plate (235,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Shopping bag hook
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 11 lbs (5 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
Floor mat
A retaining pin is located on the driver’s
side of the vehicle next to the fuel filler
door release. Fit the grommet in the carpet
onto the pin to prevent the carpet from
moving.
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat designed with
grommets in the correct loca-
tions.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed back in its proper
location and is correctly secured
on its retaining pins.
Interior equipment 6-13
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (236,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-14 Interior equipment
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Cargo area cover (if
equipped)
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
1) Holder
1. Insert the seatbelt webbing into the
holder of the third-row seat.
2. Fold down the seatback of the third-
row seat. Refer to “Folding down the
seatback” F1-15.
3. To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as sh own. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or collision. This
could cause serious injury.
Black plate (237,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
CAUTION
. Be careful not to pinch your hand
betw een the headrest and the
cargo area cover when you re-
cline the second-row seat.
. Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover.
Scratches on the stays c ould
cause leakage of gas from the
stays, which may result in their
inability to hold the rear gate
open.
NOTE
When the head restraint is adjusted at
the rearmost position of the seat with
the seatback leaned back, the head
restraint comes in contact with the
cargo area cover. In this case, raise
the seatback before adjusting the head
restraint.
If the head restraint is correctly fixed in
any of the lock positions, the head
restraint does not contact the cargo
area cover even when the seatback is
reclined.
& To remove the cover
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the
cover housing t o shorten the cover ’s
length.
3. Take it off the retainer.
& To install the cover housing
1. Remove the cover at the cover hous-
ing retaining part using a flat-head screw-
driver.
2. Pull either sleeve on the end of the
cover housing to shorten the cover ’s
length.
Interior equipment 6-15
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (238,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-16 Interior equipment
3. Insert the projections located on the
both ends of the sleeve into the recesses
of the retainers.
Convenient tie-down hooks
CAUTION
The convenient tie-down hooks are
designed only for securing l ight
cargo. Never try to secure cargo
that exce eds the capacity of the
hooks. The maximum load capacity
is 44 lbs (20 kg) per hook.
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a luggage net or ropes.
When using the tie-down hooks, turn them
down out of the storing recesses. When
not in use, put the hooks up into the
storing recesses.
Under-floor storage compart-
ment
The subfloor storage compartment is
located under the floor of the cargo area
and can be used to store small items. To
open the lid, pull the handle up.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lid of the sub-
floor storage compartment
closed while driving to reduce
the risk of injury in the event of
sudden stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the s ubfloor storage
compartment.
Black plate (239,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Hang the hook provided on the underside
of the lid on the rear edge of the roof to
keep the lid open.
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System (if equipped)
1) HomeLink
®
buttons
2) Indicator light
3) Hand-held transmitter*
* Not part of your vehicle’s remote
keyless entry system but of a
HomeLink
®
-compatible device.
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System,
located on the driver’s sun visor, is a
handy way to operate, from inside of your
vehicle, up to three remote-co ntroll ed
indoor and outdoor devices, such as
garage door openers, entrance gates,
door locks, home lighting, and security
systems. There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the sun visor, each of which
you can program for operation of one
desired device. For details on the device
types which can be operated by this
system, consult the HomeLink website at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
Note the following about this system:
If your vehicle is equipped with the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System, it
complies with Part 15 of the Federal
Communication Commission Rules in the
U.S. and the RSS-210 of Industry Canada
in Canada. Its operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes and modifications to this system
by anyone other than an authorized
service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operating a
Interior equipment 6-17
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (240,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-18 Interior equipment
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way
of the garage do or opener or
other device to prevent potential
harm or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with any
garage door opener that lacks
the safety stop and reverse fea-
ture as required by applicable
safety standards. A garage door
opener which cannot detect an
object, signaling the door to stop
and reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
website at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or device testing in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
& Garage door opener pro-
gramming in the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
When reprogramming any of the
HomeLink
®
buttons that are already
programmed for other devices, perform
the procedure in step 2.
2. Press and hold the two outside
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash (after 10 seconds). Re-
lease both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink
®
buttons on the driver’s sun
visor, keeping the indicator light in view.
Black plate (241,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
4. Using both hands, simultaneously
push the hand-held transmitter button
and the desired HomeLink
®
button. DO
NOT release the buttons until step 5 has
been completed.
5. Hold down b oth buttons until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink
®
indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con-
tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be pro-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform additional steps.
Refer to “Programming rolling-code-pro-
tected garage door openers in the U.S.A.”
F6-19.
NOTE
Rolling-code-protected garage door
openers are manufactured after 1996.
See the instruction manual of your
garage opener for confirmation.
7. Reconnect the motor of your garage
door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your garage door opener by
pressing the programmed HomeLink
®
but-
ton.
& Programming rolling-code-
protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F6-18 above.
Then continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second per son
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage doo r opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-
tion manual.
Interior equipment 6-19
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (242,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-20 Interior equipment
1) Training button
2. Press the training butto n on the
garage door opener motor hea d unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press and
release the HomeLink
®
button that was
programmed in the section above. Press
and release the button a second time to
complete the programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above procedure a
third time to complete the program-
ming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the Hom eLink
®
button is pressed.
& Programming for entrance
gates and garage door open-
ers in Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
2. Press and hold the two outside buttons
until the HomeLink
®
indicator light begins
to flash (after 10 seconds). Release both
buttons.
NOTE
When reprogramming any of the
HomeLink
®
buttons that are already
programmed for other devices, perform
the procedure in step 2.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
buttons on
the driver’s sun visor, keeping the indica-
tor light in view.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
Black plate (243,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
& Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
& Operating the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
& Erasing HomeLink
®
button
memory
NOTE
. Performing this procedure erases
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed H omeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash
(after 10 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
& In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink
®
button after
programming, contact HomeLink at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
Rear view camera (if
equipped)
A rear view camera is attached to the rear
gate. When the ignition switch is “ON” and
the select lever is set to “R”, the rear view
camera automatically displays the rear
view image behind the vehicle on the
navigation monitor or on the inside mirror.
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should
always check the rear view and
Interior equipment 6-21
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (244,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-22 Interior equipment
the surrounding area with your
eyes and mirrors, and move
backward at a slow speed. Mov-
ing backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your S UBARU deale r
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire or
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful removing it .
Otherwise, damage done to the
camera may cause a fire or
electric shock. Pour water or
lukewarm water over the camera
to remove mud and ice, and wipe
it with a soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has hard coating to
help prevent scratches. However, when
washing the vehicle or cleaning the
camera lens, be careful not to scratch
the camera lens. Do not use a washing
brush directly on the camera lens. The
monitor screen may be adversely af-
fected.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop white light stripes
around the light source. This is not a
malfunction.
. Under the fluorescent light, the dis-
play may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be s lightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
& How to use the rear view
camera
When the select lever is set to “R”, the rear
view camera automatically displays the
rear view image from the vehicle. When
the lever is set to other positions, the
image before setting to “R” is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the select lever to “R”.
Black plate (245,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
NOTE
. The image of the rear view camera
has priority over other screen displays.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rearview camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
Range of view
Range of view
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the r ear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Interior equipment 6-23
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (246,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-24 Interior equipment
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera is limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
& Help line
The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen.
Help lines displayed on the navigation
monitor
Help lines displayed on the inside mirror
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 6.5 feet (2 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
4) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
5) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
When the select lever is set to position
“R”, the monitor screen displays the help
lines together with the rear view image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
Black plate (247,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may occur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi-
tion.
! Difference between screen and ac-
tual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
! When there is an upward slope at the
back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope at
the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
thantheactualdistanceasinan
upward slope.
Interior equipment 6-25
– CONTINUED –
6
Black plate (248,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6-26 Interior equipment
! Feature of distance marker
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
2) 6.5 feet (2 m) line
3) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 3
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-2
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-2
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-3
State emission tes ting (U.S. only)...................... 7-5
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-7
Starting the engine.............................................. 7-7
Stopping the engine............................................ 7-8
Remote engine start system (dealer option)..... 7-8
Starting your vehicle ........................................... 7-9
Remote start safety features ................................ 7-9
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start.................................................................. 7-9
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown.......................................................... 7-9
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-10
Service mode ..................................................... 7-10
Remote engine start transmitter programming
and programmable feature option ..................... 7-10
System maintenance .......................................... 7-11
Automatic transmission..................................... 7-12
Select lever ........................................................ 7-13
Shift lock function .............................................. 7-14
Selection of manual mode .................................. 7-16
Driving tips ........................................................ 7-17
SPORT mode ..................................................... 7-18
Power steering................................................... 7-18
Braking ............................................................... 7-19
Braking tips....................................................... 7-19
Brake system .................................................... 7-19
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-20
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-20
ABS system self-check ...................................... 7-21
ABS warning light.............................................. 7-21
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ............................................................. 7-22
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-22
Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-23
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-25
Traction Control system OFF switch................... 7-25
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........ 7-27
Parking your vehicle ......................................... 7-28
Parking brake .................................................... 7-28
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-29
Cruise control .................................................... 7-29
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-30
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-30
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-31
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-31
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-32
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-32
Starting and operating
7
Black plate (252,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-2 Starting and operating
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inappropri ate fuel
additive may cause engine damage.
& Fuel requirements
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane a nd Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact
your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with
the specified octane rating and y our
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! California fuel
If your vehicle was certified to California
Emission Standards as indicated on the
underhood tune-up label, it is designed to
optimize engine and emission control
system performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
side California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service. The CHECK ENGINE warning
light/Malfunction indicator light may also
illuminate. If this occurs, return to your
authorized SUBARU dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light may illuminate. If
this happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Fuels con-
taining alcohol may cause paint
damage, which is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
Your use of gasoline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
Black plate (253,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gaso lines,
which ar e designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AN D if it is accompani ed by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line b efore seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveability
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
2. Open the fuel filler lid.
Starting and operating 7-3
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (254,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-4 Starting and operating
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar o bject to discharge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carry-
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
first stop the engine and close all
vehicle doors and windows.
Make sure that there are no
lighted cigarettes, open flames
or electrical sparks in the adja-
cent area. Refueling must be
performed outside. Quickly wipe
up any spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the ca p
quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop me chanism on the
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically turns off. Do not add
any more fuel.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
5. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
6. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
If you spill any fuel on the painted surface,
rinse it off immediately. Otherwise, the
painted surface could be damaged.
Black plate (255,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning l ight/malfunction indi cator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
dicator light” F3-12.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit, and
your fuel tank and emission con-
trol system may be damaged. It
could also lead to fuel spillage
and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tank
could cause damage to the en-
gine.
State emission testing (U.S.
only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
tempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
Starting and operating 7-5
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (256,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-6 Starting and operating
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the sta te em ission inspe ction
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspec-
tion of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle
passes the OBDII system
inspection if prop er op eration of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
. A vehicle
fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is greater than one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to reset the readiness monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector
not to place your SUBARU
AWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-
sion damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
Black plate (257,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood and rear gate are
fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indica tor l ight s when the ig niti on
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other fluid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Starting the engine
CAUTION
. Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10
seconds. If the engine fails to
start after operating the starter
for 5 to 10 seconds, wait for 10
seconds or more before trying
again.
. If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do
not attempt to place the select
lever of a moving vehicle into the
“P” position.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably “P” position). The
starter will only operate when the select
lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-9.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the eng ine d oes not start, try the
following.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK” position and wait for at least
10 seconds. After checking that the
parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”
position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pe dal and turn the ignitio n
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the “LOCK ”
position. After waiting for 10 seconds
or longer, turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
Starting and operating 7-7
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (258,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-8 Starting and operating
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
NOTE
. The engine may be difficult to start
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosis
function. To overcome it, keep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
. To protect the engine while the
select lever is in the “P” or “N”
position, the engine is controlled so
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
depressed hard.
Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing an d braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK” position on the
ignition switch, causing the steering
wheel to lock.
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
WARNING
. Do not start the engine using the
remote start system in an en-
closed environment (e.g. closed
garage). Prolonged operation of
a motor vehicle in an enclosed
environment can cause a harmful
build-up of Carbon Monoxide.
Carbon Monoxide is harmful to
your health. Exposure to high
levels of Carbon Monoxide can
cause headaches, dizziness or in
extreme cases unconsciousness
and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.
Black plate (259,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Starting your vehicle
The remote engine start system is acti-
vated by pressing the “
” button twice
within 3 seconds on your remote engine
start transmitter. The system will check
certain pre-conditions before starting, and
if all safety parameters are correct, the
engine will start within 5 seconds. While
the vehicle is operating via remote engine
start, the vehicle’s power window features
will be disabled. Also, the system has a
timer and will shut down after 15 minutes if
you do not operate the vehicle. Press and
hold the “
” button for 2 seconds again to
turn the vehicle off. If the vehicle’s starter
cranks but does not start or starts and
stalls, the remote engine start system will
power off then attempt to start the vehicle
an additional four times. If the vehicle fails
to start after the additional attempts, the
remote engine start system will abort and
return to a non activated state.
& Remote start safety features
For safety and security re asons, the
system will fail to start and beep the horn
twice or shut down the engine during
remote start operation if any of the
following occur:
. The brake pedal is depressed before
the vehicle ignition switch is turned “on”
. The key was already in the ignition
switch
. The engine hood is opened
. The vehicle’s engine idle speed has
reached a level over 3,000 RPM
. The alarm is triggered by opening any
of the doors or the rear gate.
NOTE
. The security indicator light on the
dashboard will stop flashing while
under remote engine start operation,
but the vehicle is still protected.
. If the vehicle is entered during
remote engine start operation, the
system will not record entry in the
alarm history.
& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger and the remote engine start system
will turn off. Inserting the key into the
ignition switch and turning it to the “ON”
position or pressing the unlock button “
”
on the remote keyless entry transmitter
will disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Alarm system” F2-16.
2. Enter the vehicle. Do not depress the
brake pedal.
3. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn to the “ON” position. If the ignition
switch is accidentally turned to the
“START” position, the system’s “starter
anti-grind” feature will prevent the starter
from re-cranking.
4. Depress the brake pedal. The remote
starter disengages, the vehicle’s power
window features are re-enabled and the
vehicle will operate normally.
& Entering the vehicle follow-
ing remote engine start shut-
down
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
Starting and operating 7-9
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (260,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-10 Starting and operating
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
vehicle, the heater or air-conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Service mode
In service mode, the remote start function
is temporarily disabled to prevent the
system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
! To engage the service mode
Turn the igni tion swi tch to t he “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake pedal
then, press and release the “
” button on
the remote engine start transmitter three
times. The system will pause for 1 second
and then flash the parking lights and honk
the horn three times indicating that the
system is in service mode. When attempt-
ing to activate the remote start system
while in service mode, the parking lights
will flash and the horn will honk two times
and will not start.
! To disengage the service mode
Turn the i gnition switch to the “ON”
position, depress and hold the brake
pedal, then press and release the “
”
button on the remote engine start trans-
mitter three times. The system will pause
for 1 second and flash the parking lights
one time indicating that the system has
exited service mode.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
system.
& Remote engine start trans-
mitter programming and pro-
grammable feature option
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that remote engine start transmitters
are lost, stolen or damaged. The remote
engine start system also has one pro-
grammable feature that can be adjusted
for user preference.
The remote engine start system can be
programmed to either make an audible
horn chirp upon remote start activation or
not. Remote engine start transmitter pro-
gramming and feature programming can
be adjusted using the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Insert the key into the vehicle’s ignition
switch and turn to the “ON” position.
3. Locate the small black programming
button behind the fuse box cover, on the
driver’s side left under the dashboard
panel.
4. Press and hold the black programming
button for 10 to 15 seconds. The horn will
honk and the parking lights will flash three
times to indicate that the system has
entered programming mode. At this point
you can perform either action (step 5 or
step 6).
5. To program a remote transmitter:
press and release the “
” button on each
transmitter. The horn will honk and the
parking lights will flash one time to indicate
a successful transmitter learn each time
the “
” button is pressed. You can
program up to eight transmitters.
6. To toggle the Horn Confirmation chirps
ON/OFF: press and release the brake to
toggle the feature. The horn will chirp and
the parking lights will flash one time to
indicate Confirmation Horn Chirps are
“OFF”. The horn will honk and the parking
lights will flash 2 times to indicate Con-
firmation Horn Chirps are “ON”. Depres-
Black plate (261,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
sing the brake pedal repeatedly will toggle
the feature ON or OFF each time.
7. To ex it the remote transmitter and
feature programming mode, turn the igni-
tion switch to the “LOCK ” position, remove
the key from the ignition switch and test
operation of the remote transmitter(s) and
horn confirmation feature.
& System maintenance
! Changing the batteries
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to damage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; chil dren could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-1220) supplied in your remote engine
start transmitter should last approximately
three years, depending on usage. When
the batteries begin to weaken, you will
notice a decrease in range (distance from
the vehicle that your remote engine start
system operates). Follow the instructions
below to change the remote control
batteries.
1. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
Starting and operating 7-11
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (262,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-12 Starting and operating
2. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and slide the white
plastic battery holder out from under the
battery tab releasing the batteries. Re-
move the old batteries and replace with
new ones. Be sure to observe the (+) sign
on the old batteries before removing them
to ensure that the new batteries are
inserted properly (battery “+” should be
pointed away from the transmitter circuit
board on both batteries).
3. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, then test the remote engine start
system.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Automatic transmission
The automatic transmission is electroni-
cally controlled and provides 5 forward
speeds and 1 reverse speed. Also, it has a
manual mode and a SPORT mode.
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the brake is set or when
chocks are used in the wheels.
This may cause the automatic
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Avoid shifting from one of the
forward driving positions into the
Black plate (263,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
“R” position or vice versa until
the vehicle has completely
stopped. Such shifting may
cause damage to the transmis-
sion.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Avoid parking
for a long time with the select
lever in any other position as
doing so could result in a dead
battery.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the automatic transmis-
sion will upshift to higher engine
speeds than when the coolant tempera-
ture is sufficiently high in order to
shorten the warm-up time and improve
driveability. The gearshift timing will
automatically shift to the normal timing
after the engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after ATF (automatic
transmission fluid) is replaced, you
may feel that the automatic transmis-
sion operation is somewhat unusual.
This results from invalidation of data
which the on-board computer has
collected and stored i n memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
& Select lever
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the button in.
: Shift while pressing the button in.
: Shift without pressing the button.
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and also has manual gate for
using “SPORT” mode or manual mode.
1) Select lever button
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine.
In this position, the transmission is me-
chanically locked to prevent the vehicle
from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first set the
parking brake fully, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the transmission.
To shift the select lever from the “P” to any
other position, you have to depress the
brake pedal fully then push the select
lever button on the lever knob when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position. This
prevents the vehicle from lurching when it
Starting and operating 7-13
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (264,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-14 Starting and operating
is started.
If the select lever does not move from the
“P” position with the brake pedal de-
pressed, the select lever button pushed
in, and the ignition switch in the ON
position, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-
14.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle.
To shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop
the vehicle completely then move the
lever to the “R” position while pushing
the select lever button.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine.
In this position the wheels and transmis-
sion are not locked. In this position, the
transmission is neutral; the vehicle will roll
freely, even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the tra nsmission
neutral.
During coasting, there is no engine brak-
ing effect.
NOTE
When the ignition switch has been
turned to the “LOCK” position, move-
ment of the select lever from the “N”
position to the “R” position is possible
for a limited time period by depressing
the brake pedal and then b ecomes
impossible. If the select lever becomes
impossible to be moved after a limited
time period, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the “P”
position.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (Neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving.
The transmission automatically shifts into
a suitable gear from 1st to 5th according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require.
When more acceleration is required in this
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift
to 4th, 3rd, 2nd or 1st gear. When you
release the pedal, the transmission will
return to the original gear position.
To use the SPORT mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate.
To use the manual mode, move the lever
from this position into the manual gate
then move it toward the “+” and “−” ends.
! While climbing a grade
When driving up a hill, undesired upshift to
4th or 5th gear is prevented from taking
place when the accelerator is released.
This minimizes the chance of subsequent
downshifting to a lower gear when accel-
erating again. Th is preve nts repeate d
upshifting and downshifting resulting in a
smoother operation of the vehicle.
NOTE
The transmission may downshift to 2nd
or 1st gear, depending on the way the
accelerator pedal is depressed to ac-
celerate the vehicle again.
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
Black plate (265,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
the “P” position to any other position
before t he brake pedal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the key from the “Acc” position to the
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition key cylinder.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK” position while the select lever is in
the “N” position, the select lever may not
be moved to the “P” position after a period
of time. Therefore, move the select lever
to the “P” position with the brake pedal
depressed soon after the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position.
! Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-15.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R” or “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the “Acc” position, move the
select lever to the “R” or “P” position with
the select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-15.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and stop the
engine.
2. Remove the cover by prying on the
edge with a flat-head screwdriver.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the cover, wrap
the tip of the flat-head screwdriver with
vinyl tape or a cloth before removing
the cover.
Starting and operating 7-15
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (266,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-16 Starting and operating
1) Shift lock release button
2) Select lever button
3. Move the select lever while performing
the following operations.
. Depressing the brake pedal
. Pushing the shift lock release button
using a screwdriver
. Pushing the select lever button
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
& Selection of manual mode
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the manual gate then move it to
the “+” end or “−” end of the manual gate
to select manual mode.
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator in the
tachometer illuminate. The gear position
indicator shows the currently selected
gear in the 1st-to-5th-gear range. The
upshift and downshift indicators show
when a gearshift is possible. When the
upshift indicator “
” is illuminated, up-
shifting is possible. When the downshift
indicator “
” is illuminated, downshifting
is possible. When both indicators are
illuminated, upshifting and downshifting
are both possible. When the vehicle stops
(for example, at traffic signals), the down-
shift indicator turns off.
Black plate (267,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Gearshifts can be performed using the
select lever.
Shift to the next-higher gear by briefly
pushing the select lever toward the “+”
end of the manual gate.
Shift to the next-lower gear by briefly
pulling the select lever toward the “−”
end of the manual gate.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. When the temperature of the engine
oil is higher than normal, warning
beeps are emitted and the shift position
indicator shows “−”. If these warnings
are issued, deselect the manual mode
to protect the engine from damage.
. The transmission does not automa-
tically shift up in the manual mode.
Perform gearshifts in accordance with
road conditions so that the tachometer
needle does not enter the red zone. If
the engine speed reaches a predeter-
mined level, a fuel-cut function will
operate. Shift up if this happens. Also,
the transmission may a utomatic ally
shift up to protect the engine.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the select lever twice in rapid succes-
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid becomes too high,
the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light will
illuminate and upshifts to 5th gear will
not be possible. Immediately stop the
vehicle in a safe place and let the
engine idle until the warning light turns
off.
& Driving tips
. On a road surface where there is a risk
of wheelspin (for example, a snow- or
gravel-covered road), you can pull away
from a standstill safely and easily by first
selecting the 2nd gear of the manual
mode.
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always set the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
problem.
. A slight reduction in output torque may
occur before the engine warms up.
Starting and operating 7-17
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (268,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-18 Starting and operating
& SPORT mode
SPORT mode is used when power is
needed for rapid acceleration or for uphill
driving. To select this mode, move the
select lever from the “D” position to the
manual gate.
When selected, the SPORT mode indica-
tor light on the combination meter will
illuminate.
To deselect SPORT mode, move the
select lever to the “D” position or select
manual mode. To subsequently reselect
SPORT mode, move the select lever to
the “D” position and from there to the
manual gate.
In this mode, the transmission shifts up at
higher vehicle speeds and shifts down
more responsively than in normal mode.
Power steering
CAUTION
Do not hold the steering wheel at the
fully locked position left or right for
more than 5 seconds. This may
damage the power steering pump.
The power steering system operates only
when the engine is running.
If you lose power steering assist because
the engine stops or the system fails to
function, you can steer but it will take
much more effort.
NOTE
Right after the engine has been started
and before it has warmed up, you may
hear a noise coming from areas adja-
cent to the power steering pump which
is located at the right-front area of the
engine compartment. This noise is
normal. It does not indicate power
steering system trouble.
Black plate (269,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving straight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has a dual circuit brake
system. Each circuit works diagonally
across the vehicle. If one circuit of the
brake system should fail, the other half of
the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
depress it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. If engine
manifold vacu um becomes insufficient,
such as when driving at high altitude, a
vacuum pump assures a sufficient va-
cuum to operate the brake booster. Do not
turn off the engine while driving because
that will turn off the brake booster, result-
ing in poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking dis-
tance will increase.
NOTE
Some sound accompanying operation
of the vacuum pump may be heard
from the engine compartment during
driving. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
NOTE
When you depress the b rake pedal
Starting and operating 7-19
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (270,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-20 Starting and operating
suddenly, the brake pedal might wig-
gle. This is a normal operation phe-
nomenon, and it is not a malfunction.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle inspected by
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with an ABS
equipped vehicle could easily lead
to a serious accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS system does not always
decrease stopping distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS
system than one without. When
driving under these conditions,
therefore, reduce your speed and
leave ample distance from other
vehicles.
. When you feel the ABS system
operating, you should maintain
Black plate (271,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
constant brake pedal pressure.
Do not pump the brake pedal
since doing so may defeat the
operation of the ABS system.
The ABS system prevents the lock-up of
wheels which may occur during sudden
braking or braking on slippery road sur-
faces. This helps prevent the loss of
steering control and directional stability
caused by wheel lock-up.
When the ABS system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
when the ABS operates.
The ABS system will not operate when the
vehicle speed is below approximately 6
mph (10 km/h).
& ABS system self-check
You may feel a slight shock in the brake
pedal and hear the operating sound of
ABS from the engine compartment just
after the vehicle is started. This is caused
by an automatic functional test of the ABS
system being carried out and does not
indicate any abnormal condition.
& ABS warning light
The ABS warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and turns off after approximately 2
seconds.
This is an indication that the ABS system
is working properly.
CAUTION
If the warning light behaves as
follows, the ABS system may not
be working properly.
When the warning light illuminates,
the ABS function shuts down; how-
ever, the conventional brake system
continues to operate normally.
. The warning light does not illu-
minate when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, but
it does not turn off even when the
vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
mately 8 mph (12 km/h).
. The warning light illuminates dur-
ing driving.
If these occur, have the ABS system
repaired at the first available oppor-
tunity by your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following, the ABS
system may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 8 mph (12
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
Starting and operating 7-21
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (272,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-22 Starting and operating
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfu nction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS system and uses some of the ABS
system’s components to perform its func-
tion of optimizing the distribution of brak-
ing force. If any of the ABS components
used by the EBD system malfunction, the
EBD system also stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning l ight illuminate simultan eously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
Black plate (273,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
warni ng light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
2. Shut down the engine, apply the
parking brake, and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. If both
warning lights turn off, the EBD system
may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level. Refer to “Brake fluid”
F11-17.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive c arefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working
properly. If the light remains
illuminated, have the brakes in-
spected by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving with a Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system equipped
vehicle could easily lead to a ser-
ious accident.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
Starting and operating 7-23
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (274,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-B" EDITED: 2015/ 12/ 8
7-24 Starting and operating
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle equipped with Vehicle
Dynamics Control system, have
an inspection of that system
performedbyanauthorized
SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly.
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is shown by
flashing the Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is shown by flashing
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
NOTE
. Slight twitching of the brake pedal
may be felt when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system operates; a small de-
gree of vehicle or steering wheel shak-
ing may also be noticed in this situa-
tion. These are normal characteristics
of Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
and are no cause for alarm.
. When driving off immediately after
starting the engine, a short operation
noise may be noticed coming from the
engine compartment. This noise is
generated as a result of a check being
performed on the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and is normal.
. Depending on the timing of activa-
tion of the brakes, the brake pedal may
seem to jolt when you drive off after
starting the engine. This is a conse-
quence of the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operational check and is normal.
. In the circumstances shown in the
following list, the vehicle may be more
unstable than it feels to the driver. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
therefore operate. Such operation does
not indicate a system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is towing a
trailer
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. Even if the vehicle is equipped with
a Vehicle Dynamics Control system, it
Black plate (275,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
is important that winter tires be used
when driving on snow-covered or icy
roads. (All four wheels should be fitted
with tires of the same size and brand).
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if the vehicle is equipped with
Vehicle Dynamics Control.
. All four wheels should be fitted with
tires of the same size, type, and brand;
furthermore, the amount of wear
should be the same for all four tires. If
these precautions are not observed
and non-matching tires are used, it is
quite possible that the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system will be unable
to operate correctly as intended.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire as failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
Refer to the following sections.
. “Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light (U.S.-spec models a nd Canada-
spec. models)/Vehicle Dynamics Control
operation indicator light (all models)” F3-
18
. “Traction Control system OFF indicator
light (U.S.-spec models a nd Canada-
spec. models)” F3-19
. “Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light (Latin America-spec. models)/Trac-
tio n Control OFF indicator light (Latin
America-spec. models)” F3-19
& Traction Control system OFF
switch
Tract ion C ontrol system OFF indicator
light (U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec.
models)
Starting and operating
7-25
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (276,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-26 Starting and operating
Traction Control system OFF indicator
light (Latin America-spec. models)
Traction Control system OFF switch
Pressingtheswitchtodeactivatethe
Traction Control system can facilitate the
following operations.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehicle when i ts
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
When the switch is pressed during engine
operation, the Traction Control system
OFF indicator light on the combination
meter illuminates. The Traction Control
system will be deactivated and the vehicle
will behave like a model not equipped with
the Traction Control system. When the
switch is pressed again to reactivate the
Traction Control system OFF indicator
light turns off.
With the Traction Control system deacti-
vated, traction enhancement offered by
Traction Control system is unavailable.
Therefore you should not deactivate the
Traction Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Traction Control sys-
tem, the Traction Control system auto-
matically reactivates itself the next time
the ignition key is turned to the “LOCK”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 10
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Traction Control system
is activated, and the system ignores
any further pressing of the switch. To
make the switch usable again, turn the
ignition key to the “LOCK” position and
restart the engine.
. Whentheswitchispressedto
deactivate the Traction Control system,
the vehicle’s running performance is
comparable with that of a vehicle that
does not have a Traction Control
system. Do not deactivate the Traction
Control system except when absolutely
necessary.
Black plate (277,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the tire
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures increase
accordingly. Be sure to let the tires
cool thoroughly before a djusting
their pressures to t he standard
values shown on the tire placard.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.
The tire pressure monitoring system
does not function when the vehicle
is stationary. After adjusting the tire
pressures, increase the vehicle
speed to at least 20 mph (32 km/h)
to start the TPMS re-checking of the
tire inflation pressures. If the tire
pressures are now above the severe
low pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any ti re liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking for
approximately one minute, promptly
contact a SUBARU dealer to have
the system inspected.
Starting and operating 7-27
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (278,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-28 Starting and operating
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts under the driver’s seat. This
may cause poor reception of the
signals from the tire pressure sen-
sors, and the tire pressure monitor-
ing system will not function prop-
erly.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Parking your vehicle
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to them.
. Do not park t he vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
& Parking brake
CAUTION
. Never dr ive while the par king
brake is set because th is will
cause unnecessary wear on the
brake linings. Before starting to
drive, always make sure that the
parking brake has been fully
released.
. Never drive with your foot on the
parking brake pedal.
To set the parking brake, hold down the
brake pedal while depressing the parking
brake pedal as far as it will go.
Black plate (279,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
To release the parking brake, hold down
the brake pedal while depressing the
parking brake pedal and slowly releasing
it.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the brake system
warni ng light illumi nates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light” F3-
16.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always set the
parking brake firmly and put the select
lever in the “P” (Park) position. Always set
the parking brake firmly when parking your
vehicle. Never rely on the transmission
alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel. When the vehicle is
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
Cruise control
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more. Make sure the
main switch is turned “OFF” when the
cruise cont rol is n ot in use to avo id
unintentionally setting the cruise control.
NOTE
If you move the cruise control lever or
press the main switch button while
turning the ignition switch “ON”, the
cruise control function is deactivated
and the cruise control indicator light
flashes. To reactivate the cruise control
function, turn the ignition switch back
to the “Acc” or “LOCK” position, and
then turn it again to the “ON” position.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on sli ppery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
Starting and operating 7-29
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (280,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-30 Starting and operating
. towing a trailer
& To set cruise control
1. Push the main switch button.
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
3. Push the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction and release it.
Then release the accelerator pedal.
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated on the combination
meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desired
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
There are three ways to cancel the cruise
control temporarily:
. Pull the control lever toward you.
Black plate (281,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Shift the select lever into the “N”
position.
The cruise control set indicator light on the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (32
km/h) or more, push the control lever
upward in the “RES/ACC” direction to
return to the original cruising speed auto-
matically.
The cruise control set indicator light on the
combination meter will automatically illu-
minate at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Push the main switch again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “Acc” or
“LOCK” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by control
lever)
Push the control lever upward in the “RES/
ACC” direction and hold it until the vehicle
reaches the desired speed. Then, release
the control lever. The vehicle speed at that
moment will be memorized and treated as
the new set speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the control lever upward in the
“RES/ACC” direction quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal)
1. Depress th e accelerator pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desi red
speed.
2. Push the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
NOTE
If the difference between the actual
vehicle speed when the control lever
is pushed downward and the speed last
time you set is less than 4 mph (6.8
km/h), the vehicle speed will be low-
ered by 1 mph (1.6 km/h). This occurs
because the cruise control system unit
regards this lever operation as that
intended to decrease the vehicle
speed.
Starting and operating 7-31
– CONTINUED –
7
Black plate (282,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
7-32 Starting and operating
! To decrease the speed (by control
lever)
Push the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction and hold it until
the vehicle reaches the desired speed.
Then, release the control lever. The
vehicle speed at that moment will be
memorized and treated as the new set
speed.
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressing the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction quickly.
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “SET/COAST” direction
once. Now the desired speed is set and
the vehicle will keep running at that speed
without depressing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control indicator light
Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
F3-22.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-22.
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-4
On-road and off-road driving.............................. 8-6
Winter driving...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Tire chains......................................................... 8-11
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-12
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rails and crossbar (if equipped) .................. 8-14
Roof molding and crossbar (if equipped)............ 8-17
Trailer hitch (if equipped) .................................. 8-18
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-19
When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 8-20
Trailer towing ..................................................... 8-21
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-21
Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-21
Trailer hitches.................................................... 8-24
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-25
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-26
Driving tips
8
Black plate (286,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-2 Driving tips
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoi d star ting suddenly an d rapi d
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braki ng, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to a newly installed or overhauled
engine or w hen brake pads or brake
linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
your fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for as long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxi de, a c olorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoi d remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
Black plate (287,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the rear gate closed while
driving to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flam mable materi als (e.g.
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and f lammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
ter:
. Use only unleaded gasoline. Even a
small amount of leaded gasoline w ill
damage the catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn off the ignition switch while
the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or in complete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
Driving tips 8-3
8
Black plate (288,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-4 Driving tips
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Bookle t” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-2.
. Comply with all regulations and re-
quirements of each country.
Driving tips for AWD models
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive model could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed sym-
bol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
odometer calibration, and clear-
ance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and
Black plate (289,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumferences,
construction, manufacturer,
brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
index. Mixing tires of other sizes,
circumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking and speed-
ometer/odometer cali bration. I t
also may be dangerous and lead
to loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD models
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt or sand. By
shifting power between the front and rear
wheels, SUBARU AWD can also provide
added traction during acceleration, and
added engine braking force during decel-
eration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handling,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
F9-14.
Driving tips 8-5
8
Black plate (290,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-6 Driving tips
On-road and off-road driving
WARNING
. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seatbelt. You the driver and
all your passengers should fas-
ten the seatbelts before starting
to drive in order to minimize the
chance of serious injury or death.
. Do not make sharp turns and
quick maneuvers unless abso-
lutely unavoidable. Such actions
are dangerous as you may lose
control, possibly resulting in a
rollover which could cause death
or serious injury.
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Whenever strong crosswinds are
present, slow down sufficiently
to maintain control of your vehi-
cle. Remember that your vehicle,
with its higher profile and center
of gravity, is more likely to be
affected by crosswinds than or-
dinary passenger cars.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive model could easily
lead to a serious accident.
Your vehicle is cl assified as a utility
vehicle. Utility vehicles feature a higher
ground clearance which enables them to
be used for wide applications including off-
road driving. But please keep in mind that
your vehicle is neither a conventional off-
road vehicle nor an all-terrain vehicle. A
higher center of gravity in relation to the
tread width as compared with ordinary
passenger cars makes vehicles of this
type more likely to roll over. In reality, utility
vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
over rate than other types of vehicles. The
high ground clearance of this vehicle is a
real advantage, giving you a better view of
the road and allowing you to anticipate
problems earlier. However, remember that
your utility vehicle is not designed for high-
speed cornering comparable to ordinary
passenger cars and that your vehicle
could roll over if you make a sharp turn
at high speed. If you do take your
SUBARU off-road, certain common sense
precautions such as those in the following
list should be taken.
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead drive
with yo ur fingers and th umbs on the
outside of the rim.
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
Black plate (291,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and completely through the stream. The
water should be shallow enough that it
does not reach the vehicle’s undercar-
riage. Water entering the engine air intake
or the exhaust pipe or water splashing
onto electrical parts may damage your
vehicle and may cause it to stall. Never
attempt to drive through rushing water;
regardless of its depth, it can wash away
the ground from under your tires, resulting
in possible loss of traction and even
vehicle rollover.
. Always check your brakes for effec-
tiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. Do not dri ve or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after engine
stops. This could create a fire hazard.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the select lever
back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
. Frequent driving of an AWD model
under hard-driving conditions such as
rough roads or off roads will necessitate
more frequent replacement of engine oil,
brake fluid and transmission oil than that
specified in the maintenance schedule
described in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Booklet”.
Remember that damage done to your
SUBARU while operating it off-road and
not using common se nse preca utions
such as those listed above is not eligible
for warranty coverage.
Driving tips 8-7
8
Black plate (292,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-8 Driving tips
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cables. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
Use an engine oil of proper grade and
viscosity for cold weather. Heavy summer
oil will cause harder starting.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or separate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Con-
centration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100%
−498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outsid e
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive . Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
Black plate (293,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
Clear away ice and snow t hat h as
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
Do not use t he parking brake w hen
parking for long periods in cold weather
since it could freeze in that position.
Instead, you should observe the following
tips.
1. Place the select lever in “P” position.
2. Use t ire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
When the vehicle is parked in snow or
when it snows, raise the wiper blades off
the glass to prevent damage to them.
When the vehicle has been left parked
after use on roads heavily covered with
snow, or has been left parked during a
snowstorm, icing may develop on the
brake system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow or ice
buildup on the suspension, disc brakes
and brake hoses underneath the vehicle.
If there is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the disc
brakes and brake hoses and ABS har-
ness.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this purpose . When an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake system and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
Driving tips 8-9
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (294,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-10 Driving tips
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your v ehicle’s braking perfor-
mance on snowy and icy ro ads. Fo r
information about braking on slippe ry
surfaces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-20 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-23.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window. If the wiper
blades are frozen to the windshield or rear
window, use the defroster with the airflow
control button in the “
” position and the
temperature control dial set for maximum
warmth until the wiper blades are com-
pletely thawed out. The wiper deicer is
helpful to thaw the windshield wipe r
blades. To thaw out the rear wiper blade,
use the rear window defogger.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow control button in “
” and
the temperature control dial set for max-
imum warmth. After the windshield gets
warmed enough to melt the frozen snow
on it, wash it away using the windshield
washer.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons in which you could have snow
and freezing temperatures. Blades of this
type give superior wiping performance in
snowy conditions. Be sure to use blades
that are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high -speed driving , non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
WARNING
. When replacing original tires with
winter (snow) tires, make sure
you use only tires of the same
size, circumference, construc-
tion, brand (tread pattern), speed
symbol and load index as the
original tires listed on the tire
placard. Using tires of other sizes
or constructions may affect
speedometer/odometer calibra-
tion and clearance between the
body and tires. It also may be
dangerous and lead to loss of
vehicle control.
. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, circum-
ferences, construction, manufac-
turer, brand (tread pattern), de-
gree of wear, speed symbol and
load index. Mixing tires of other
sizes, circumferences or con-
structions may result in severe
mechanical damage to the drive
train of your vehicle and may
affect ride, handling, braking and
speedometer/odometer calibra-
tion. It also may be dangerous
and lead to loss of vehicle con-
Black plate (295,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
trol.
. Do not use a combi nation of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” which are designed to provide an
adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving. In winter, it may be possible to
enhance performance through use of tires
designed specifica lly for winter driving
conditions.
If you choose to install winter tires on your
vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire size
and type. You must install four winter tires
that are of the same size, construction,
brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
Your vehicle comes with P255/55R18
“all season tires” as original equip-
ment. You should be aware that some
winter tires with that same size desig-
nation may actually be too large for the
vehicle and may cause rubbing on
sharp turns. Listed in the following is
the winter tire size that we recommend.
Recommended winter (snow) tire size
P255/55R18 stud less
& Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of t he la ck of
clearance between the tires and
vehicle body.
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the select
lever back and forth between “D” and “R”
repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For
the best possible traction, avoid spinning
the wheels when trying to free the vehicle.
When th e road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st.
For information about holding the trans-
mission in the 2nd position, refer to
“Selection of manual mode” F7-16 and
“Driving tips” F7-17.
Driving tips 8-11
8
Black plate (296,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-12 Driving tips
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
Never allow passengers to ride on a
folded rear seatback or in the cargo
area. Doing so may result in serious
injury.
WARNING
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close to the floor as
possible.
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the
extended luggage cover. Such
items could tumble forward in
the event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
ious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
Black plate (297,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to t he
driver’s side door shows GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) and GAWR (Gross
Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your vehicle on a
vehicle scale, found at a commercial
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Driving tips 8-13
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (298,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-14 Driving tips
& Roof rails and crossbar (if
equipped)
1) Roof rails
2) Crossbar kit
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rail must be used together
with a roof crossbar kit and the
appropriate carrying attachment.
The roof rail must never be used
alone to carry cargo. Otherwise,
damage to the roof or paint or a
dangerous road hazard due to
loss of cargo could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
The roof rails are not designed to carry
cargo b y th emselves . C argo can be
carried after securing the roof crossbar
kit to the roof rai l and install ing the
appropriate carrying attachment. Wh en
installing the roof crossbar kit, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar ki t and a carrying
attachment, never exceed the maximum
load limit as explained below. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
on loading cargo into or onto your vehicle,
refer to “Loading your vehicle ” F8-12. The
maximum load limit of the cargo, cross-
bars and carrying attachment must not
exceed 150 lbs (68 kg) .Placethe
heaviest load at the bottom, nearest the
roof, and evenly distribu te the cargo.
Always properly secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
ment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg).
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
that the cargo is properly secured on the
attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
The crossbars can be removed when you
do not use the roof to carry cargo.
Black plate (299,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
! To remove the crossbar
1. Loosen and remove the T-30 torx
®
head screw from the top of each crossbar
end support.
Loosen the lower clamps.
2. Carefully raise the crossbar from roof
rails.
! To install the crossbar
Front crossbar:
Front crossbar has a 150 lbs (68 kg) load
label on left-hand side.
1) T-25 torx
®
head screw
1. Make sure that the T-25 torx
®
head
screw on the back of each crossbar end
support is tightened correctly.
2. Before placing the crossbar on the roof
rails, make sure that the T-30 torx
®
head
screw is removed from the top of each
crossbar end support.
3. The crossbar with a 150 lbs (68 kg)
load label attached onto it is the front
crossbar. An arrow is marked on the back
of the front crossbar for correct installa-
tion. Install the front crossbar so that the
arrow faces the front of the vehicle.
Driving tips 8-15
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (300,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-16 Driving tips
1) 12 in (300 mm)
4. Install the front crossbar so that the
crossbar end supports are located ap-
proximately 12 in (300 mm) rearward from
the joints between the roof rails and the
front roof rail supports.
1) Lower clamp
2) T-30 torx
®
head screw
5. Tighten the lo wer clamps onto the
crossbar. Using a torque wrench, loosely
tighten the T-30 torx
®
head screws.
NOTE
It may be necessary to squeeze the
lower clamp and the end support
together to compress the pads and
gain a better alignment of the pieces
while trying to start the screw. Use care
not to cross-thread the screw in the
insert.
6. Adjust the alignment of the crossbar
on the roof rails, and if available, use a T-
30 torx
®
bit and torque wrench and tighten
the T-30 torx
®
head screws to 30 to 35
lbf·in (3.4 to 4.0 N·m, 0.35 to 0.41 kgf·m) of
torque (or tighten securely with the torx
®
wrench provided).
Black plate (301,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Rear crossbar:
1) 2 in (50 mm)
Install the rear crossbar so that the cross-
bar end supports are located approxi-
mately 2 in (50 mm) forward from the
joints between the roof rails and the rear
roof rail supports.
Install the rear crossbar in the same
manner as the front crossbar.
CAUTION
Do not carry cargo on the roof when
the crossbars are removed. Lug-
gage on the roof will be thrown
forward or backward in sudden
stops or rapid accelerations, result-
ing in a dangerous road hazard.
NOTE
Before each use of the roof crossbar,
make sure the four T-30 crossbar
clamp screws ha ve been checked,
and retightened if necessary to 35 lbf·in
(4.0 N·m, 0.41 kgf·m), as outlined in
Step #5 above.
& Roof molding and crossbar
(if equipped)
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof molding must be used to-
gether with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying at-
tachment. Otherwise, damage to
the roof or paint or a dangerous
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
Cargo can be carried after securing the
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and
installing the appropriate carrying attach-
ment. When installing the roof crossbar
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying
attachment, never exceed the maximum
load limit as explained below. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). Refer to the
“Loading your vehicle” section in this
chapter for information on loading cargo
into or onto your vehicle. The maximum
load limit of the cargo, crossbars and
carrying attachment must not exceed 150
lbs (68 kg). Place the heaviest load at the
bottom, nearest the roof, and evenly
distribute the cargo. Always pro perly
Driving tips 8-17
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (302,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-18 Driving tips
secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of the cro ssbars is
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
ment) of not more than 150 lbs (68 kg).
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
that the cargo is properly secured on the
attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
Each of the two roof moldings has two
mounting points for crossbars. Each
mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
a screwdriver to remove the covers. When
installing the crossbars on the roof mold-
ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Trailer hitch (if equipped)
1) Trailer hitch
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-21.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
Black plate (303,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates fr om the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could g et loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross tongue
weight
Vehicle with-
out cooling kit
2,000 lbs
(906 kg)
200 lbs
(90 kg)
Vehicle with
cooling kit
3,500 lbs
(1,587 kg)
350 lbs
(158 kg)
When you tow a trailer, follow the instruc-
tions in “Trailer towing” F8-21.
& Connecting a trailer
1. Remove the receiver cover from the
hitch receiver tube. Then insert the ball
mount into the hitch receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole on the
hitch receiver tube so that the pin passes
through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin into the hitch pin
securely.
4. Pull the ball mount to make sure it
does not come off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
Driving tips
8-19
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (304,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-20 Driving tips
5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriate
for the ball mount and your trailer. The
hitch ball must be securely installed on the
ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
maximum gross weight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to part
of the vehicle other than the safety
chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’ black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, right turn signal, left turn signal,
stop, and parking lights on the trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
& When you do not tow a trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using the terminal
grease.
Black plate (305,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Trail er towing
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appr opriate for your
vehicle. In addition, be sure to follow the
instructions on correct installation and use
provided by the trailer and other towing
equipment manufacturers.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipme nt, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
& Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (en-
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never excee d the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are accepta-
ble.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum weight shown in the following
table.
Driving tips 8-21
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (306,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-22 Driving tips
Vehicle without cooling kit
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 2,000 lbs (906 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Vehicle with cooling kit
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
1,750 lbs (794 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehicle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
GVWR is shown on the certification label
located on the driver ’s door of your
vehicle.
Black plate (307,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Certification label
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR are also
shown on the certification label.
Certification label
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
Tongue load
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing corne ring, res ulting in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the appropriate one
of the following maximum values.
Driving tips 8-23
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (308,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-24 Driving tips
Vehicle without cooling kit: 200 lbs (90 kg)
Vehicle with cooling kit: 350 lbs (158 kg)
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration
above. When weighing the tongue load,
be sure to position the towing coupler at
the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
& Trailer hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and
trailer.
The use of a genuine SUBARU trailer
hitch is recommended. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
Black plate (309,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
SUBARU dealer.
If use of a non-genuine hitch is unavoid-
able, be sure the hitch is suited to your
vehicle and trailer. Consult with a profes-
sional h itch supplier to assist you in
choosing an appropriate hitch for your
vehicle. Be sure to follow all of the hitch
manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
Never use a hitch that mounts only to the
rear bumper. The bumper is not designed
to handle that type of load.
For all types of hitches, regularly check
that the hitch mounting bolts and nuts are
tight.
& Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped wi th its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surge brakes a re
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regul ations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Pass the chains crossing each
other under the trailer tongue to prevent
the trailer from dropping onto the ground
in case the trailer tongue should discon-
nect from the hitch ball. Allow sufficient
slack in the chains taking tight turn
situations into account; however, be care-
ful not to let them drag on the ground.
For more information about the safety
chain connection, refer to the instructions
for your hitch and trailer.
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that t he standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
Driving tips 8-25
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (310,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-26 Driving tips
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
! Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct spli cing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehi cle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals, the brake
lights and parking lights each time you
hitch up.
! Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
porary spare tire is used. The tem-
porary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated.
The recommended cold tire pressure
under trailer towing conditions is shown
in “Tires” F12-8 and in “GAS STATION
REFERENCE” at the end of this manual.
Adjustthereartirepressuretothe
recommended pressure when the tires
are cold. Normal pressu re s hou ld b e
maintained in the front tires.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer i n hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent from normal operation. For
safety’s sake, you should employ
extra caution when towing a
trailer and you should never
speed. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle sits horizontally
with the trailer attached. If the vehicle is
tipped sharply up at the front and down at
the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Checkthatthetirepressuresare
correct.
Black plate (311,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that
– the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer ’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
ated.
– the safety chains are connected
properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the tra iler could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and slow down
immediately but gradually.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
erable distance is required because of the
added w eight and len gth ca used by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by the nearest SUBARU
dealer.
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the water temperature gauge
pointer and AT OIL TEMP warning light
because the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating under
these conditions. If the water temperature
gauge pointer approaches the OVER-
HEAT zone or the AT OIL TEMP warning
light illuminates, immediately turn off the
Driving tips 8-27
– CONTINUED –
8
Black plate (312,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
8-28 Driving tips
air conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
nearest safe location. For further instruc-
tions and additional information, refer to
the following sections.
–“If you park your vehicle in an
emergency” F9-2
–“Engine overheating” F9-14
–“Temperature gauge” F3-8
–“AT OIL TEMP warning light” F3-13
NOTE
The temperature of engine coolant is
less likely to rise to the OVERHEAT
zone in the “D” position than in the
manual mode position.
. Avoid using the accelerator pedal to
stay stationary on an uphill slope instead
of using the parking brake or foot brake.
That may cause the transmission fluid to
overheat.
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. But if parking on a
hill or slope cannot be avoided, you
should take the following steps.
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into “P” and shut off the engine.
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
If you park your vehicle in an emergency......... 9-2
Spare tire ............................................................. 9-2
Removing the spare tire ...................................... 9-3
Re-storage of spare tire ....................................... 9-4
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-5
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ............ 9-10
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-11
How to jump start............................................... 9-12
Engine overheating ........................................... 9-14
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-14
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-14
Towing ................................................................ 9-14
Towing and tie-down hooks................................ 9-15
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-17
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
unlocked.......................................................... 9-18
Maintenance tools ............................................. 9-19
Jack and jack handle ......................................... 9-19
In case of emergency
9
Black plate (316,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-2 In case of emergency
If you park your vehicle in an
emergency
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Spare tire
The spare tire is stored in the spare tire
holder located under the cargo area.
The spare tire holder has a hoist mechan-
ism that can lower and raise the spare tire
easily.
The spare tire holder is designed to carry
only the following kinds of tires.
. the temporary spare tire that came with
your vehicle
. a full-size flat tire
A full size flat tire should be stowed in the
spare tire holder in an emergency only.
After having the full-size flat tire repaired,
immediately swap it with the temporary
spare tire.
Before using the temporary spare tire,
Black plate (317,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
carefully read “Temporary spare tire” F9-5
for instructions and precautions.
& Removing the spare tire
1. Take the wheel nut wrench and exten-
sion out of the tool bag. Refer to “Main-
tenance tools” F9-19.
2. Remove the subfloor storage lid in the
cargo area.
3. Take out the jack.
4. Locate the hex-head hoist shaft end
inside the hole.
5. Fit the extension onto the hex-head
hoist shaft end.
6. Fit the wheel nut wrench onto the
extension.
7. Turn the hoist shaft end counterclock-
wise with the wheel nut wrench until the
temporary spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it
out from under the vehicle.
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove (not simply
keep it open) the subfloor sto-
rage lid before turning the wheel
nut wrench, otherwise the lid
may be damaged.
. Do not put your fingers into the
center hole of the temporary
spare tire while you pulling it
out, because they might be
pinched in between the wheel
and the retainer.
8. Tilt the retainer at the end of the cable
In case of emergency 9-3
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (318,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-4 In case of emergency
and pull it through the center of the
temporary spare tire.
9. After the temporary spare tire is
removed from the cable, the cable must
be wound up completely by turning the
hoist nut shaft clockwise until you hear a
clicking sound. Also visually inspect the
cable to make certain that there is no
longer any slack present.
WARNING
. Do not use the extension when
turning the wheel nuts. If you did,
you would not be able to achieve
sufficient tightening torque. The
wheel nuts could then come
loose, r esulting in a serious
accident.
. When using the spare tire hoist:
After the temporary spare tire is
removed from the cable, wind the
cable up completely until the
retainer at end of the cable sits
against the underside of the
vehicle. Driving with the cable
not retracted fully could result in
damage to the adjacent under
floor parts and lead to a serious
accident.
. The spare tire holder is designed
to carry only the following kinds
of tires.
– the temporary spare tire that
came with your vehicle
– a full-size flat tire
A full size flat tire should b e
stowed in the spare tire holder
in an emergency only. After hav-
ing the full-size flat tire repaired,
immediatelyswapitwiththe
temporary spare tire.
Never stow a full-size tire that is
not flat in the spare tire holder.
Doing so can result in damage to
adjacent under floor parts and
can lead to a serious accident.
CAUTION
When using the spare tire hoist:
Do not use air tools or power tools
to turn the spare tire hoist shaft end.
If you do, it could result in severe
mechanical damage to the spare tire
hoist.
& Re-storage of spare tire
1. Turn the spare tire hoist shaft end
counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench to loosen the cable sufficiently
enough to allow the cable end retainer go
through center h ole of th e tempo rary
spare tire.
2. Insert the retainer through the center
hole of the temporary tire (with the outside
Black plate (319,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
of the tire facing up).
3. Turn the hoist shaft end clockwise with
the wheel nut wrench to wind the cable up
completely until you hear a few clicking
sounds. Confirm that the temporary spare
tire holding cable has been wound up
completely by shaking the temporary tire.
CAUTION
If the temporary spare tire is not
stored securely, it could damage
adjacent areas of the vehicle and
make an abnormal noise.
4. Place the wheel nut wrench and
extension back into the tool bag and store
the jack and tool bag in their storage
locations.
5. Fit the lid of the cargo area.
CAUTION
. When stowing a flat tire in the
spare tire holder, turn the hoist
shaft end on ly slowly. If it is
turned quickly, the wheel disc of
the flat tire could be damaged.
. A full-size flat tire should be
stowed in the spare tire holder
in an emergency only. After hav-
ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-
ately swap it with the temporary
spare tire.
. Remember that the tread width of
a flat tire is wider than that of the
temporary spare tire. When car-
rying a flat tire stowed in the
spare tire holder, make sure the
tire does not touch any obsta-
cles.
Temporary spare tire
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
In case of emergency 9-5
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (320,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-6 In case of emergency
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
Black plate (321,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Set the parking brake securely and
shift in the “P” (Park) position.
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
1) Jack handle
2) Jack
3) Spare tire
5. Take out the jack and jack handle.
The jack and jack handle are stored under
the floor of the cargo area.
6. Remove the spare tire.
Refer to “Spare tire” F9-2 for its location,
instructions and precautions.
Carefully read “Temporary spare tire” F9-
5 and strictly follow the instructions.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated
before using it.
Chrome plated wheels
7. Insert the tip (wrapped in vinyl tape or
a cloth) of a flat-head screwdriver into the
slot between the wheel and cap. Use it to
remove the cap. (Only vehicle equipped
with chrome plated wheels)
In case of emergency 9-7
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (322,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-8 In case of emergency
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
12. Remove the tire cover if the temporary
spare tire has a cover.
13. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
14. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
Black plate (323,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
15. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
CAUTION
There are 2 types of wheel nut
wrenches that apply to different
lengths.
For models with silver-colored alu-
minum wheels, the 10.8-inch (275
mm) wheel nut wrench is equipped
as a maintenance tool. And for
models with optional chrome-fin-
ished wheels, the 13.2-inch (335
mm) wheel nut wrench is equipped
as well. Confirm the equipped wheel
nut wrench type when you replace a
tire. If the wheel nut wrench is the
different type, it cannot be tightened
to the specified torque.
1) The length of the wheel nut wrench
16. Confirm the length of the equipped
wheel nut wrench and wheel nut tighten-
ing torque. Refer to “Tires” F12-8.
17. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
Never use your foot on the wheel nut
wrench or a pipe extension on the wrench
because you may exceed the specified
torque. Have the wheel nut torque
checked at the nearest automotive service
facility.
WARNING
Do not use the extension when
turning the wheel nuts. If you did,
you would not be able to achieve
sufficient tightening torque. The
wheel nuts could then come loose,
resulting in a serious accident.
18. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
In case of emergency 9-9
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (324,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-10 In case of emergency
holder.
Refer to “Spare tire” F9-2 for its location,
instructions and precautions.
CAUTION
. When stowing a flat tire in the
spare tire holder, turn the hoist
shaft end only slowly. I f it is
turned quickly, the wheel disc of
the flat tire could be damaged.
. A full-size flat tire should be
stowed in the spare tire holder
in an emergency only. After hav-
ing the flat tire repaired, immedi-
ately swap it with the temporary
spare tire.
. Remember that the tread width of
a flat tire is wider than that of the
temporary spare tire. When car-
rying a flat tire stowed in the
spare tire holder, make sure the
tire does not touch any obsta-
cles.
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collisions, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, never
brake suddenly and keep driving
straight ahead while gradually redu-
cing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe place. Otherwise an
accident involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal injury
could occur.
Check the pressure for all four tires
and adjust the pressure to the COLD
tire pressure shown on the vehicle
placard on the door pillar on the
driver’s side. If this light still illumi-
nates while driving after adjusting
the tire pressure, a tire may have
significant damage and a fast leak
that causes the tire to l ose air
rapidly. If you have a flat tire, replace
it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
Black plate (325,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
Do not inject any tire liquid or
aerosol tire sealant into the tires,
as this may cause a malfunction of
the tire pressure sensors.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly fl ush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid has
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are avail-
able.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it is
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
In case of emergency 9-11
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (326,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-12 In case of emergency
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
Black plate (327,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of th e other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, car efully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
In case of emergency 9-13
9
Black plate (328,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-14 In case of emergency
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe place.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
Turn off the engine and get everyone
away from the vehicle until it cools down.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
1. Keep the en gine r unni ng at id ling
speed.
2. Open the hood to ventilate the engine
compartment. Refer to “Engine hood”
F11-4.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact your authorized
dealer for repair.
3. After the engine coolant temperature
has dropped, turn off the engine.
If the temperature gauge stays at the
overheated zone, turn off the engine.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank.
If the coolant level is below the “LOW”
mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
Towing
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe t he foll owing
procedures for safety.
Black plate (329,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Towing and tie-down hooks
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the specified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks. Never
use suspension parts or other
parts of the body for towing or
tie-down purposes.
. Neve r use the tie-down hook
closest to the muffler under the
vehicle for towing purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
bumper and the towing hook, do
not apply excessive lateral load
to the towing hooks.
Front towing hook:
1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver
and wheel nut wrench from the tool bag.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyl
tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between
the cover and the front bumper, and use it
to pry the cover open.
NOTE
. The cover is attached to the front
bumper with five lugs.
. Do not remove the cover while
holding the slit.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until the threads can no longer be
seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using a jack handle.
In case of emergency 9-15
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (330,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-16 In case of emergency
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Rear towing hook:
1. Take out the towing hook, screwdriver
and wheel nut wrench from the on board
tool bag.
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using a wheel nut wrench.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bag.
Put the thread hole cover on the rear
bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
Front tie-down hooks:
Black plate (331,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
Rear tie-down hooks:
The rear tie-down hooks are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down hooks only for
downward ancho ring. I f they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip off
the hooks, possibly causing a dan-
gerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
2. Press the parking brake pedal firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being towed because
the steering wheel and the direc-
tion of the wheels will be locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take gr eater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
In case of emergency 9-17
– CONTINUED –
9
Black plate (332,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
9-18 In case of emergency
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. Do not run the engine while being
towed using this method. Trans-
mission damage could result if
the vehicle is towed with the
engine running.
. The traveling speed must be
limited to less than 20 mph (30
km/h) and the traveling distance
to less than 31 miles (50 km). For
greater speeds and distances,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in neutral.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“Acc” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
Rear gate – if the rear gate
cannot be unlocked
In the event that you cannot unlock the
rear gate by operating the power door
locking switches or the remote keyless
entry system, you can unlock it from inside
the cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
flat-head screwdriver.
2. Locate the rear gate lock release lever
behind the rear gate trim panel.
3. Unlock the rear gate by moving the
lever to the right.
4. Open the rear gate from outside by
raising the rear gate handle.
Black plate (333,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
Screwdriver
Towing hook (eye bolt) (if equipped)
Wheel nut wrench
Extension
& Jack and jack handle
The jack and jack handle is stored under
the cargo area.
For how to use the jack, refer to “Flat tires”
F9-6.
In case of emergency 9-19
9
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interi or.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, switches, combination
meter, and other plastic surface ....................... 10-5
Navigation monitor (if equipped) ........................ 10-6
Appearance care
10
Black plate (336,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
10-2 Appearance care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly pressing the brake
pedal to heat up the brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and areas adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air in-
take, electrical parts or the power
steering fluid res ervoir, it will
cause engine trouble or a mal-
function of the power steering.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with a rear wiper, automatic car-
wash b rushes could bec ome
tangled around it, damaging the
wiper arm and other compo-
nents. Ask the automatic car-
wash operator not to let the
brushes touch the wiper arm or
to fix the wiper arm on the rear
window glass with adhesive tape
before operating the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car was h is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or muddy or sandy
roads, wash the mud and sand off the
underbody.
Carefully flush the suspension and axle
parts, as they are particularly prone to
mud and sand buildup. Do not use a
sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.
NOTE
Be careful not to damage brake hoses,
sensor harnesses, and other parts
when washing suspension comp o-
Black plate (337,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
nents.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as mouldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coarser grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
acompoundoranincorrectpolishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
list.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax w ith organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
num whe els) with water as soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care 10-3
10
Black plate (338,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
10-4 Appearance care
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
1. The accumulation of moisture retain-
ing dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
2. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
1. It is exposed to road salt or dust
control chemicals, or used in coastal
areas where there is more salt in the air,
or in areas where there is considerable
industrial pollution.
2. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
3. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
4. High temperatures will cause corro-
sion to parts of the vehicle which cannot
dry quickly due to lack of proper ventila-
tion.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regu larly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash the vehicle
promptly after driving on any of t he
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventil ated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, and hood latch should
be inspected and lubricated periodically.
Black plate (339,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft blush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabri c surface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and luke-
warm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
NOTE
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and headrests be covered,
or the windows shaded, to prevent fading
or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrin kles, which is characteristi c of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
NOTE
Strong cleaning agents such as sol-
vents, paint thinners, window cleaner
or gasoline must never be used on
leather or synthetic interior materials.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, switches,
combination meter, and other
plastic surface
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
NOTE
Do not use organic solvents such as
paint thinners or gasoline, or strong
cleaning a gents that contain th ose
solvents.
Appearance care 10-5
– CONTINUED –
10
Black plate (340,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
10-6 Appearance care
& Navigation monitor (if
equipped)
To clean the navigation monitor, wipe it
with a silicone cloth or with a soft cloth. If
the navigation monitor is extremely dirty,
clean it with a soft cloth moistened with
neutral detergent then carefully wipe off
any remaining detergent.
NOTE
. Do not spray neutral detergent di-
rectly onto the monitor. Doing so could
damage the monitor’s components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a hard
cloth. Doing so could scratch the
monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that con-
tains thinner, gasoline, or any other
volatile substance. Such cleaning fluid
could erase the let tering on the
switches at the bottom of the monitor.
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When you do checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-4
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-4
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-6
Engine oil............................................................ 11-7
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-7
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-8
Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 11-9
Synthetic oil....................................................... 11-9
Cooling system ................................................ 11-10
Hose and connections...................................... 11-10
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-11
Air cleaner elemen t .......................................... 11-12
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-12
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-13
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-13
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-13
Automatic transmission fluid .......................... 11-14
Checking the fluid level .................................... 11-14
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-15
Front differential gear oil ................................. 11-15
Checking the oil level ....................................... 11-15
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16
Rear differential gear oil .................................. 11-16
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-16
Power steering fluid ........................................ 11-16
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-16
Recommended fluid ......................................... 11-17
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-17
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-17
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-18
Brake booster .................................................. 11-18
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-19
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-19
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-19
Replacement of bra ke pad and lining ............ 11-19
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-20
Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-20
Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-21
Types of tires................................................... 11-21
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .......... 11-21
Tire inspection................................................. 11-22
Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-23
Wheel balance ................................................. 11-25
Wear indicators ............................................... 11-25
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-25
Tire rotation..................................................... 11-26
Tire replacement.............................................. 11-26
Wheel replacement .......................................... 11-27
Aluminum wheels ............................................ 11-27
Windshield washer fluid.................................. 11-28
Replacement of wiper blades ......................... 11-29
Windshield wiper blade assembly..................... 11-30
Windshield wiper blade rubber......................... 11-30
Rear window wiper blade assembly.................. 11-31
Maintenance and service
11
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Maintenance and service
Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-31
Battery. .............................................................. 11-33
Fuses ................................................................ 11-34
Main fuse .......................................................... 11-35
Installation of accessories............................... 11-36
Replacing bulbs ............................................... 11-36
Headlights (models with HID headlights) ........... 11-36
Headlights (models without HID headlights) ...... 11-36
Parking light (right-hand side)........................... 11-38
Front turn signal light (right-hand side) ............. 11-39
Front fog light.................................................. 11-39
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-39
Back-up light/Tail light ..................................... 11-40
Rear gate light ................................................. 11-41
License plate light ........................................... 11-41
Dome light....................................................... 11-42
Map light ......................................................... 11-43
Vanity mirror light ............................................ 11-43
Door step light................................................. 11-43
Cargo area light............................................... 11-44
Black plate (343,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Maintenance schedule
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Testing of an All-W heel Drive
model must NEVER be per-
formed on a single two-wheel
dynamometer or similar appara-
tus. Attempting to do so will
result in transmission damage
and in uncontrolled vehicle
movement and may cause an
accident or injuries to persons
nearby.
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
a safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or all ow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
Maintenance and service 11-3
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (344,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-4 Maintenance and service
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
erative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for these wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-
sioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and set
the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine is stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. Always remove the key from the
ignition switch. When the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position,
thecoolingfanmayoperate
suddenly even when the engine
is stopped.
& When you do checking or
servicing in the engine com-
partment while the engine is
running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, belts and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Engine hood
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
positions.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Black plate (345,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3. Release the secondary hood release
located under the front grille by moving the
lever toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lower the hood to a point approxi-
mately 20 in (50 cm) from the closed
position and then give the hood a strong
push down to make it drop.
2. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position. Do not push
the hood forcibly to close it . It could
deform the metal.
WARNING
Always ch eck that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while t he vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
CAUTION
When closing the hood, be careful
not to pinch your or other person’s
hands or anything else in the hood.
Maintenance and service 11-5
11
Black plate (346,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-6 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment overview
1) Air cleaner element (page 11-12)
2) Power steering fluid reservoir
(page 11-16)
3) Differential gear oil level gauge
(page 11-15)
4) Automatic transmission fluid level gauge
(page 11-14)
5) Brake fluid reservoir (page 11-17)
6) Fuse box (page 11-34)
7) Battery (page 11-33)
8) Windshield washer tank (page 11-28)
9) Radiator cap (page 11-11)
10) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-7)
11) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)
12) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-7)
Black plate (347,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Engine oil
NOTE
. The engine oil consumption rate is
not stabilized, and therefore cannot be
determined until the vehicle has tra-
veled at least several thousand miles
(kilometers). Even after break-in, when
the vehicle is used under severe driv-
ing conditions such as those men-
tioned in the “Warranty and Mainte-
nance Book let ”, engine oil is con-
sumed or deteriorated more quickly
than under normal driving conditions.
If you drive your vehicle under these
severe conditions, you should check
the oil level at least at every second
fuel fill-up time, and change the oil
more frequently. Please refer to the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet ”
for more details.
. If the oil consumption rate seems
abnormally high after t he break-in
period, for example more than 1 quart
per 1,200 miles or 1 liter per 2,000
kilometers, we recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer.
& Checking the oil level
Check the engine oil level at each fuel
stop.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
inserted until it stops with the graphic
symbol “
” on its top appearing as
shown in the illustration.
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from the low level to the full level
4. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
low level (L), add oil to bring the level up to
the full level (F).
CAUTION
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
Maintenance and service 11-7
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (348,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-8 Maintenance and service
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. I f
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
If you check the oil level just after stopping
the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to
drain back into the oil pan before checking
the level.
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do not
add any additional oil above the full level
when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
CAUTION
. If you change your own oil, be
sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal.
. Do not dispose of used engine oil
by placing it in the trash, or by
pouring it onto the ground, into
sewers, or into any body of water.
Check with your local govern-
ment office for the proper dis-
posal options available to you.
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil f ilter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently ma de, or when driv ing in
extremely cold weather.
1. Warm up the engine by letting the
engine idle for approximately 10 minutes
to ease draining the engine oil.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
3. Remove the oil filler cap.
4. Drain out the engine oil by removing
the drain plug while the engine is still
warm. The used oil should be drained into
an appropriate container and disposed of
properly.
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself with
hot engine oil.
5. Wipe the seating surface of the drain
plug with a clean cloth and tighten it
securely with a new sealing washer after
the oil has completely drained out.
6. Open the access cover by removing
the five clips and turning the access cover
counterclockwise. The oil filter will be
exposed.
Black plate (349,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
7. Remove the oil filter with an oil filter
wrench.
8. Clean the rubber seal seating area of
the bottom of engine and install the oil
filter by hand turning. Be careful not to
twist or damage the seal.
9. Tighten the oil filter by the amount
indicated in the following table after the
seal makes contact with the bottom of
engine.
Oil filter color Part number
Amount of ro-
tation
Black 15208AA031
3/4 rotation
CAUTION
. Never over tighten the oil filter
because that can result in an oil
leak.
. Thoroughly wipe off any engine
oil that has spilled over the
exhaust pipe and/or under-cover.
If left unremoved, the oil could
catch fire.
10. Reinstall the cover under the oil filter.
11. Pour engine oil through the filler neck.
For the oil capacity guideline, refer to
“Engine oil” F12-4. The necessary quan-
tity of oil depends on the quantity of oil that
has been drained. The quantity of drained
oil differs slightly depending on the tem-
perature of the oil and the time the oil is
left flowing out. After refilling the engine
with oil, therefore, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the level is correct.
12. Start the engine and make sure that no
oil leaks appear around the filter’s rubber
seal and drain plug.
13. Run the engine until it reaches the
normal operating temperature. Then stop
the engine and wait a few minutes to allow
the oil drain back. Check the oil level
again and if necessary, add more engine
oil.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
Maintenance and service 11-9
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (350,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-10 Maintenance and service
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Cooling system
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top off the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Hose and connections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the engine coolant tempera-
ture gauge exceeds the normal operating
range, the cooling fan circuit may be
defective. Check the fuse and replace it
if necessary. If the fuse is not blown, have
the cooling system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
Black plate (351,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
as required.
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the caps and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant changed by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Maintenance and service 11-11
11
Black plate (352,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-12 Maintenance and service
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not i nstalled
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
It is unnecessary to clean or wash the
element.
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance s chedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
1) Connector
2) Clamp
3) Air intake boot
4) Clip
1. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Loosen the screw on the clamp and
pull the air intake boot out of the air
cleaner case.
3. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case cover.
4. Open the air cleaner case cover and
remove the air cleaner element.
5. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
and case cover with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
Black plate (353,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
6. To install the air cleaner case cover,
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case cover into the slits on the
air cleaner case.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
& Recommended spark plugs
Refer to “Electrical system” F12-7.
Drive belts
The alternator, power steering pump, and
air conditioner co mpressor depend on
drive belts. Satisfactory performance re-
quires that belt tension be correct.
It is unnecessary to check belt tension
periodically because your engine is
equipped with an automatic belt tension
adjuster. However, replacement of the belt
should be done according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet” . Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If a belt is loose, cracked, or worn, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service 11-13
11
Black plate (354,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-14 Maintenance and service
Automatic transmission fluid
& Checking the fluid level
The automatic transmission fluid expands
largely as its temperature rises; the fluid
level differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, there are two different scales
for checking the level of hot fluid and cold
fluid on the level gauge.
Though the fluid level can be checked
without warming up the fluid on the
“COLD” range, we recommend checking
the fluid level when the fluid is at operating
temperature.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is hot
Check the fluid level monthly.
1. Drive the vehicle several miles to raise
the temperature of the transmission fluid
up to normal operating temperature; 158
to 1768F (70 to 808C) is normal.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
set the parking brake.
3. First shift the select lever in each
position. Then shift it in the “P” position,
and run the engine at idling speed.
1) Yellow handle
1) HOT range
2) COLD range
3) Upper level
4) Lower level
4. Pull out the level gauge and check the
fluid level on the gauge. If it is below the
lower level on the “HOT” range, add the
recommended automatic transmission
fluid up to the upper level.
! Checking the fluid level when the
fluid is cold
When the fluid level has to be checked
without time to warm up the automatic
transmission, check to see that the fluid
level is between the lower level and upper
level on the “COLD” range. If it is below
that range, add fluid up to the upper level.
Be careful not to overfill.
CAUTION
Be careful not to sp ill automatic
transmission fluid when adding it.
If automatic transmission fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If automatic transmission fluid
gets on the exhaust pipe, be sure to
wipe it off.
Black plate (355,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
NOTE
Using any non-specified type of auto-
matic transmission fluid could result in
damage inside the transmission. When
replacing the automatic transmission
fluid, be sure to use the specified type.
Front differential gear oil
& Checking the oil level
1) Yellow handle
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
stop the engine.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
1) Upper level
2) Lower level
3. Pull out the level gauge again and
check the oil level on it. If it is below the
lower level, add oil to bring the level up to
the upper level.
CAUTION
Be careful not to spill front differ-
ential gear oil when adding it. If oil
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or a
fire. If oil gets on the exhaust pipe,
be sure to wipe it off.
Maintenance and service 11-15
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (356,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
11-16 Maintenance and service
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to “Front
differential and rear differential gear oil”
F12-6.
Rear differential gear oil
There is no oil level gauge. To check the
rear differential gear oil level, consult your
SUBARU dealer for inspection.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to “Front
differential and rear differential gear oil”
F12-6.
Power steering fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Be careful not to burn yourself
because the fluid may be hot.
CAUTION
. When power steering fluid is
being added, use only clean fluid,
and be careful not to allow any
dirt into the tank. And never use
different brands together.
. Be care ful not to spill p ower
steering fluid when adding it. If
Black plate (357,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
power steering fluid touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fire. I f
power steering fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
The power steering fluid expands greatly
as its temperature rises; the fluid level
differs according to fluid temperature.
Therefore, the reservoir t ank has two
different checking ranges for hot and cold
fluids.
Check the power steering fluid level
monthly.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface,
and stop the engine.
2. Check the fluid level of the reservoir
tank.
When the fluid is hot after the vehicle has
been run: Check that the oil level is
between “HOT MIN” and “HOT MAX” on
the surface of the reservoir tank.
When the fluid is cool before the vehicle is
run: Check that the oil level is between
“COLD MIN” and “COLD MAX” on the
surface of the reservoir tank.
3. If the fluid level is lower than the
applicable “MIN” line, add the recom-
mended fluid as necessary to bring the
level between the “MIN” and “MAX” line.
If the fluid level is extreme low, it may
indicate possible leakage. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for inspection.
& Recommended fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean w ater. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Maintenance and service 11-17
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (358,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-18 Maintenance and service
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. If the level is below “MIN”, add
the recommended brake fluid to “MAX”.
Use only brake fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following, have it checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the engine off, depress the brake
pedal several times, applying the same
pedal force each time. The distance the
pedal travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine . The pedal shoul d move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately 1 minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
Black plate (359,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free pl ay and
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.02 – 0.08 in (0.5 – 2.0 mm)
Stop the engine and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull the
brake pedal up with one finger to check
the free play with a force of less than 2 lbf
(10 N, 1 kgf).
If the free play is not within proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.16 in (55 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the aud ible
brake pad wea r indica tor, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
The disc brakes have audible wear
indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indica tor mak es a ve ry aud ible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
Maintenance and service 11-19
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (360,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-20 Maintenance and service
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows.
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
CAUTION
Pressing the parking brake pedal
too forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
certain to press the pedal slowly
and gently.
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. Depress the parki ng brake pedal
SLOWLY and GENTLY. (Pressing with a
force of approximately 34 lbf [150 N, 15
kgf].)
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
located on the parking brake pedal.
Parking brake stroke:
5 – 6 notches / 67 lbf (300 N, 30 kgf)
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenanc e Bookle t”.
When the parking brake is properly
adjusted, braking power is fully applied
by depressing the pedal five to six notches
gently but firmly (approximately 67 lbf [300
N, 30 kgf]). If the parking brake pedal
stroke is not within the specified range,
have the brake system checked and
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
Black plate (361,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
The factory-installed tires on your new
vehicle are all season tires.
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy road
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (for example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front
Rear
308F(−18C)
36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F(−128C)
38
(265, 2.65)
37
(255, 2.55)
−108F
(−238C)
40 (280, 2.8)
39 (270, 2.7)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not turn off,
the tire pressure monitoring system may
Maintenance and service 11-21
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (362,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-22 Maintenance and service
not be functioning normally. In this event,
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire pressure
warning light to turn off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
in the instrument panel will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring S ystem checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
Black plate (363,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the curbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running perfor-
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month (for example,
during a fuel stop) and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
3 hours or has been driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
Maintenance and service 11-23
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (364,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-24 Maintenance and service
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, a nd steering is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
sumption is also higher.
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the tire
magnifies the effects of road surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulti ng in
vehicle damage.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become ho t. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Black plate (365,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you s uspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU
dealer if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to
hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tire incorporates a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.071 in (1.8 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehi cle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect the tire tread reg-
ularly and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has the rotation di rection
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
Maintenance and service 11-25
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (366,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-26 Maintenance and service
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Veh icles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
tional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel. To
maximize the life of each tire and ensure
that the tires wear uniformly, it is best to
rotate the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
km). Move the tires to the positions shown
in the illustration each time they are
rotated.
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tire at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tire pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximatel y 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehicle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
Black plate (367,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
WARNING
. When replacing a tire, you must
use a tire that is of the same size,
circumference, construction,
brand (tread pattern), speed sym-
bol and load index as the original
tires listed on the tire placard.
Using tires of other sizes, cir-
cumferences or constructions
may result in severe mechanical
damage to the drive train of your
vehicle and may affect ride,
handling, braking, speedometer/
odometer calibration, and clear-
ance between the body and tires.
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control.
. You must install four tires that are
of the same size, circumference,
construction, manufacturer,
brand (tread pattern), degree of
wear, speed symbol and load
index. Mixing tires of different
types, sizes or degrees of wear
can result in damage to the
vehicle’s power train. Use of
different types or sizes of tires
can also dangerously reduce
controllability and braking per-
formance and can lea d to an
accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those wheels that are
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
Aluminum wheels
. Aluminum wheels can be scratched
and damaged easily. Handle them care-
fully to maintain their appearance, perfor-
mance, and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
– For the wheel nut tightening torque,
refer to “Tires” F12-8.
– For the wheel nut tightening proce-
dure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-
6.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for the specific wheel.
Maintenance and service 11-27
11
Black plate (368,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-28 Maintenance and service
Windshield washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
If you spray washer fluid on the windshield
but the windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates or the supply of washer
fluid appears to diminish, add washer fluid
in the tank.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add was her fluid unt il it r eac hes the
“FULL” mark on the tank.
After adding washer fluid, make sure the
windshield washer fluid warning light has
turned off.
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100% −498F(−458C)
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is too low for the outsid e
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
Black plate (369,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other materials
on the windshield or the wiper blade
results in jerky wiper operation and streak-
ing on the glass. If you cannot remove the
streaks after operating the windshiel d
washer or if the wiper operation is jerky,
clean the outer surface of the windshield
(or rear window) and the wiper blades
using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause deterioration of the
wiper blades.
. Whenyouwishtoraisethe
passenger-side wiper arm, first
raise the driver-side wiper arm.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original positions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
carefully return the wiper arms
on the windshield while support-
ing them with your hands. You
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
per arms may be deformed and/
or the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. Return the passenger-side wiper
arm to its original position before
returning the driver-side wiper
arm to its original position.
Otherwise, the passenger-side
wiper assembly and driver-side
wiper assembly will touch each
other, possibly resulting in
scratches.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures. Be sure to use genuine SUBARU
wiper blade rubbers as replacements.
Maintenance and service 11-29
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (370,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-30 Maintenance and service
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
1. Raise the windshield wiper arm on the
driver’s side.
2. Next, raise the windshield wiper arm
on the passenger’s side.
1) Stopper
3. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
direction shown by the arrow while de-
pressing the wiper blade stopper.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Lower the windshield wiper arm on the
passenger’s side slowly while supporting
it with your hands.
6. Next, lower the windshield wiper arm
on the driver’s side slowly while support-
ing it with your hands.
& Windshield wiper blade rub-
ber
1) Metal support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
metal support.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
CAUTION
Be sure to install each metal spine
so as to fit its groove completely on
the center ridge of the blade rubber.
Doing otherwise may result in dis-
location and breakage of the spine
during wiper operation.
Black plate (371,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3. Align the claws of the metal support
with the grooves in the rubber and slide
the blade rubber assembly into the metal
support until it locks.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper
blade may scratch the windshield.
& Rear window wiper blade
assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber
Maintenance and service 11-31
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (372,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-32 Maintenance and service
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Black plate (373,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work-
ing near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of spark s,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals, and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
Maintenance and service 11-33
11
Black plate (374,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-34 Maintenance and service
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes. One
is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver ’s
seat side.
Open the lid that is located above the
hood release knob and pull it toward you
to remove it.
The other one is housed in the engine
compartment.
The spare fuses are stored in the main
fuse box cover in the engine compart-
ment.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
Black plate (375,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position and turn off all electrical acces-
sories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-9.
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse . If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Main fuse
Main fuse box
The main fuses are desig ned to melt
during an overload to prevent damage to
the wiring harness and electrical equip-
ment. Check the main fuses if any
electrical component fails to operate (ex-
cept the starter motor) and other fuses are
good. A melted main fuse must be
replaced. Use only replacements with the
same specified rating as the melted main
fuse. If a main fuse blows after it is
replaced, have the electrical system
checked by your nearest SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service 11-35
11
Black plate (376,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-36 Maintenance and service
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the bulbs and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-12.
& Headlights (models with HID
headlights)
WARNING
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
are used for the low beams of the
headlights. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid the
risk of an electric shock that could
result in serious injury, observe the
following precautions.
. Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and high
beam) by yourself.
. Do not remove/restore the head-
light assemblies by yourself.
. Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by your-
self.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
& Headlights (models without
HID headlights)
CAUTION
Halogen headlight bulbs become
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
Black plate (377,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
! Low beam light bulbs (right-hand
side)
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct.
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the bulb
cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the retainer spring.
5. Replace the bulb, then set the retainer
spring securely.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the bulb cover with the fixing
screws.
8. Install the air intake duct with the clips.
NOTE
Contact your SUBARU dealer for the
bulb replacement of the left-hand side.
! High beam light bulbs
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
Maintenance and service 11-37
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (378,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-38 Maintenance and service
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, move the
washer tank to the horizontal direction
(left-hand side).
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb.
4. Remove the bulb from the headlight
assembly by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time , use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
8. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
9. Set the washer tank to the original
place and secure it by clip (left-hand side).
& Parking light (right-hand
side)
1. Remove the bulb socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it counter-
clockwise.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Set the bulb socket into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise until it
locks.
NOTE
Contact your SUBARU dealer for the
bulb replacement of the left-hand side.
Black plate (379,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Front turn signal light (right-
hand side)
1. Remove the bulb socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it counter-
clockwise.
2. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pushing it and turning counterclockwise.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Set the bulb socket into the headlight
assembly and turn it clockwise until it
locks.
NOTE
Contact your SUBARU dealer for the
bulb replacement of the left-hand side.
& Front fog light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Rear combination lights
1. Remove the two covers by inserting
the tip of a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
the upper and lower screws. Then, slide
Maintenance and service 11-39
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (380,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-40 Maintenance and service
the rear combination light assembly rear-
ward and remove it from the vehicle.
1) Brake/tail light
2) Rear turn signal light
3. Remove the bulb holder from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket by
pushing it and turning counterclockwise.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Set the bulb holder into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
7. Reinstall the rear combination light
assembly by sliding the two-pronged part
of the combination light assembly securely
to each holder of the vehicle side.
8. Tighten the two mounting screws, and
then close the covers.
& Back-up light/Tail light
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove
the light cover from the rear gate trim.
1) Tail light
2) Back-up light
Black plate (381,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
4. Install the bulb socket by turning it
clockwise.
5. Install the light cover on the rear gate.
& Rear gate light
1. Use a flat-head screwdriver to remove
the rear gate light assembly from the rear
gate trim.
2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
3. Install the rear gate light assembly on
the rear gate.
& License plate light
1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver in vinyl
tape or cloth, insert it into the gap between
the license plate light assembly and the
rear gate.
2. Carefully pry the light assembly to
remove it.
3. Remove the bulb socket from the
license plate light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
Maintenance and service 11-41
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (382,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-42 Maintenance and service
4. Pull the bulb out of the socket. Install a
new bulb.
5. Set the bulb socket into the license
plate light assembly and turn it clockwise
until it locks.
6. Reinstall the license plate light assem-
bly to the rear gate.
& Dome light
Models with Rear Seat Entertainment
Models without Rear Seat Entertainment
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
Black plate (383,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Map light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Vanity mirror light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Door step light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
Maintenance and service 11-43
– CONTINUED –
11
Black plate (384,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
11-44 Maintenance and service
& Cargo area light
1. Remove the cargo area light assembly
by prying the edge of the light with a flat-
head screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens from the cargo area
light assembly.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens to the cargo area
light assembly.
6. Reinstall the cargo area light assembly
to the roof trim.
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Specifications ........................................................ 12-2
Dimensions...........................................................12-2
Engine ..................................................................12-2
Fuel ......................................................................12-3
Engine oil .............................................................12-4
Front differential and rear differential gear oil......... 12-6
Fluids ...................................................................12-7
Engine coolant ...................................................... 12-7
Electrical system...................................................12-7
Tires..................................................................... 12-8
Fuses and circuits ................................................. 12-9
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ...................................................... 12-9
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ..................................................... 12-11
Bulb chart............................................................. 12-12
Vehicle identification ........................................... 12-15
Specifications
12
Black plate (388,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
12-2 Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Overall length 191.5 (4,865)
Overall width 73.9 (1,878)
Overall height
Without roof rail 66.7 (1,695)
With roof rail 68.1 (1,730)
Wheel base 108.1 (2,745)
Tread
Front 62.0 (1,575)
Rear 62.0 (1,575)
Ground clearance
8.3 (211)
& Engine
Engine model
EZ36D
(3.6 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 6 cylinder, 4 stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cc (cu-in) 3,630 (221.5)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.62 6 3.58 (92.0 6 91.0)
Compression ratio 10.5 : 1
Firing order
1 – 6 – 3 – 2 – 5 – 4
Black plate (390,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
12-4 Specifications
& Engine oil
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-7.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
. Each quantity indicated is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
. In choosing an oil, you want the proper quality and viscosity, as well as one that will enhance fuel economy. Oils of lower
viscosity provide better fuel economy. However, in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is required to properly lubricate the
engine. The following table lists the recommended viscosities and applicable temperatures.
. When adding oil, different brands may be used together as long as they are the same API classification and SAE viscosity
as those recommended by SUBARU.
Black plate (391,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API classification SM or SN with
the words
“ENERGY CONSERVING” or
“RESOURCE CONSERVING”
or
ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can
be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst
mark)
Your vehicle is designed to use 5W-30
conventional motor oil, however 5W-30
synthetic may be used for optimum
engine performance.
If you do choose to use synthetic oil,
we recommend that you continue using
synthetic for the life of your vehicle.
– Adding the oil from L to F level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
Specifications
12-5
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (392,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
12-6 Specifications
& Front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil grade API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No. and applicable
temperature
Oil capacity*
1
– Remarks*
2
Front differential gear oil 1.5 US qt (1.4 liters, 1.2 Imp qt) “Front differential gear oil” F11-15
Rear differential gear oil 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
“Rear differential gear oil” F11-16
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
Black plate (393,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Fluids
Fluid
Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Automatic transmission fluid
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
10.4 US qt (9.8 liters, 8.6 Imp qt)
“Automatic transmission fluid” F11-
14
Power steering fluid
· SUBARU ATF
· IDEMITSU ATF HP
· “Dexron III” Type Automatic
Transmission Fluid
0.95 US qt (0.9 liters, 0.79 Imp qt)
· “Power steering” F7-18
· “Power steering fluid” F11-16
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–
“Brake fluid” F11-17
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant
Coolant type Coolant capacity
SUBARU Super Coolant
8.0 US qt (7.6 liters, 6.7 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.
& Electrical system
Battery type and capacity (5HR) 75D23L (12V-52AH)
Alternator 12V-130A
Spark plugs
SILFR6C11 (NGK)
Specifications
12-7
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (394,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
12-8 Specifications
& Tires
Tire size
P255/55R18 104H 255/55R18 105H
Wheel size 18 6 8JJ
Pressure Front
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary spare tire
Size T165/80R17
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
Aluminum wheels (silver-colored) 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)
*1*3
Chrome-finished wheels 111 lbf·ft (150 N·m, 15 kgf·m)
*2*3
Temporary spare tire wheel
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)
*1*3
*1: This torque is equivalent to applying the following load at the end of the wheel nut wrench.
When you use a wheel nut wrench of the 10.8-inch (275 mm) length: Approximately 96 to 115 lbf (43 to 52 kgf)
When you use a wheel nut wrench of the 13.2-inch (335 mm) length: Approximately 73 to 87 lbf (33 to 40 kgf)
If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*2: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 87 to 109 lbf (40 to 49 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench with a length of 13.2 inches (335
mm). If you have tightened the wheel nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible.
*3: For information about the length of the wheel nut wrench and the wheel nut tightening procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F9-6.
Black plate (395,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 20A
. Trailer hitch connector
2
Empty
3 15A
. Door locking
4 7.5A
. Front wiper deicer relay
. Moonroof
5 7.5A
. Combination meter
6 7.5A
. Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
7 15A
. Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 15A
. Stop light
9 20A
. Mirror heater
. Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A
. Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A
. Turn signal unit
12 15A
. Automatic transmission
unit
. SRS airbag system
(sub)
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
Specifications
12-9
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (396,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
12-10 Specifications
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
13 20A
. Cargo socket
14 15A
. Position light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light
15
Empty
16 10A
. Illumination
17 15A
. Seat heaters
18 10A
. Back-up light
19 7.5A
. Headlight right side re-
lay
20 Empty
21 7.5A
. Starter relay
22 15A
. Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 15A
. Rear wiper
. Rear window washer
24 15A
. Audio unit
25 15A
. SRS airbag system
(main)
26 7.5A
. Power window relay
27 15A
. Rear blower fan
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
28 15A
. Rear blower fan
29 15A
. Fog light
30 30A
. Front wiper
31 7.5A
. Auto air conditioner unit
. Integrated unit
32 7.5A
. Headlight left side relay
33 7.5A
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
Black plate (397,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 30A
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A
. Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A
. Main fan (cooling fan)
4 20A
. Console socket
5 15A
. Headlight (right side)
6 15A
. Headlight (left side)
7 20A
. Backup
8 15A
. Horn
9 25A
. Rear window defogger
10 15A
. Fuel pump
11 15A
. Automatic transmission
control unit
12 7.5A
. Engine control unit
13 15A
. Turn and hazard warning
flasher
14 20A
. Parking switch
15 7.5A
. Alternator
Specifications
12-11
12
Black plate (398,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
12-12 Specifications
Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A and B are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Black plate (399,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-65W HB3
2) Low beam headlight
Models with HID light 12V-35W D1S
Models without HID light 12V-55W H7
3) Front turn signal/Parking light 12V-28/8W 2357NA
4) Parking/Front side marker light 12V-5W 168(W5W)
5) Map light 12V-8W –
6) Dome light
Models with Rear Seat Entertainment 12V-5W –
Models without Rear Seat Entertainment 12V-8W –
7) Door step light 12V-3W –
8) Vanity mirror light 12V-3W
9) Fog light 12V-55W H3
10) Cargo area light 12V-13W 912
11) Tail light 12V-5W 168(W5W)
12) Brake/tail light 12V-27/8W 1157(W27/8W)
13) Rear turn signal light 12V-27W 1156(W27W)
14) Back-up light 12V-16W 921(W16W)
15) Rear gate light 12V-5W (W5W)
16) License plate light 12V-5W 168(W5W)
A)
Side turn signal light ––
B)
High mount stop light –
–
WARNING
. Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing
bulbs, turn off the bulbs and wait
until the bulbs cool down. Other-
wise, there is a risk of sustaining
a burn injury.
. For models with HID low beam
headlights, observe the following
precautions. Not doing so carries
the risk of an electric shock that
could result in serious injury
because the HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage.
– Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and
high beam) by yourself.
– Do not remove/restore the
headlight assemblies by your-
self.
– Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by
yourself.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Specifications 12-13
– CONTINUED –
12
Black plate (400,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
12-14 Specifications
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
Black plate (401,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Vehicle identification
1) Vehicle identification number
2) Certification and bar code label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Vehicle identification number plate
5) Model number label
6) Emission control label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
Specifications
12-15
12
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety practices...... 13-9
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-13
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-13
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-14
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-14
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-14
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-15
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Black plate (404,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-2 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These markings
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicle. Here is a brief review of the
tire sizing system with a breakdown
of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating Descrip-
tions
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
Black plate (405,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “104” means 1,984
lbs (900 kg), “100” means 1,764 lbs
(800 kg), “90” means 1,323 lbs (600
kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “H” means 130 mph
(210 km/h).
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or otherwise altered from
their original condition. I f
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) Manufact urer ’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inf lated. For example, “300 kPa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-3
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (406,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-4 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 730 kg
(1609 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction typ e
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in t he plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER + 1
NYLON SIDEWALL 2 POLYE-
STER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-14
.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
! Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure
For the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires, refer to “Tires” F12-8
.
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is affixed to the
driver’s side B-pillar.
Black plate (407,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adv erse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper in-
flation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to th e
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure out-
doors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-5
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (408,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-6 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the cor responding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mount-
ing on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Max imum permissible inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
Black plate (409,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tir e, including elevations
due to labe ling, decorations, or
protective bands or ribs.
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-7
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (410,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-8 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance between rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration , o r
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber com-
pound from the cord material in
the sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by 2.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
Black plate (411,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’s tread wear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible result ing loss of
vehicle control can lead to an
accident.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-9
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (412,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-10 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For information about the tire rota-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation”
F11-26
. Replace any damaged or
unevenly worn tires at the time of
rotation. After tire rotation, adjust
the tire pressures and make sure
the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-
tened. For information about the
tightening torque and tightening
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer
to “Flat tires” F9-6
.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown o n t he
vehicle placard attached to the
driver ’s side B-pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle’s placard.
Thevehicleplacardalsoshows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
For information about vehicle load-
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
F8-12
.
For information about towing capa-
city and weight limits, refer to
“Trailer towing” F8-21
.
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seat ing con-
figurations
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples.
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 525 kg or
1,157 lbs”.
Black plate (413,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 882 lbs (400
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by subtracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 1,157 lbs (525 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 121 lbs (55 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 55 lbs (25
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 55 lbs (25 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-11
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (414,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-12 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
vehicle is 1,157 lbs (525 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 525 kg or
1,157 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 705 lbs (320
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 88 lbs (40 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
Black plate (415,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 105 lbs (48
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 105 lbs (48 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’s maximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label affixed to
the driver’s door.
The GVWR and front and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, vehicle
and tire as shown in the following.
This could lead to an accident and
possibly result in severe personal
injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other parts of the body could break
or experience accelerated wear
that will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupant s and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and p assenger s f rom
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-13
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (416,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-14 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amou nt o f cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be
five- 150 lbs (68 kg) passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capa-
city is 650 lbs. (1,400 − 750 (5 6
150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of treadwear,
traction, and temperature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
perature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a sp ecified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
Black plate (417,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possi-
ble tire failure.
Reporting safety defects
(U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which coul d cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects 13-15
– CONTINUED –
13
Black plate (418,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 7/ 12
13-16 Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Building, Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 6/ 22
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
14-2 Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-20
Warning light ................................................. 3-15, 7-21
Accessories....................................................... 5-2, 11-36
Accessory power outlet............................................... 6-10
Active head restraint..................................................... 1-6
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control system ............................... 4-5
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-11
Airflow ........................................................................ 4-2
Airflow mode selection.................................................. 4-3
Airflow selection
Automatic climate control system ......................... 4-5, 4-8
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-16
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-18
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-27
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna system........................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-20
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-17
Armrest..................................................................... 1-13
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-13
Audio
Antenna system....................................................... 5-2
Auxiliary input jack ................................................. 5-28
Control button........................................................ 5-26
Set ......................................................................... 5-3
Auto-dimming mirror/compass.............................. 3-38, 3-41
Automatic climate control system ................................... 4-5
Automatic transmission ............................................... 7-12
Fluid ........................................................... 11-14, 12-7
MANUAL mode ...................................................... 7-16
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............. 3-13
Select lever ........................................................... 7-13
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-14
Shift lock release.................................................... 7-14
SPORT mode ........................................................ 7-18
Automatic/Emergency Locking Retractor (A/ELR) ........... 1-18
Auxiliary input jack...................................................... 5-28
B
Battery .................................................................... 11-33
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-6
Jump starting ......................................................... 9-11
Replacement (remote keyless entry system) .............. 2-11
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-36
Bottle holder ............................................................... 6-9
Brake
Assist.................................................................... 7-19
Booster ....................................................... 7-19, 11-18
Fluid ........................................................... 11-17, 12-7
Pad and lining...................................................... 11-20
Parking ....................................................... 7-28, 11-20
Pedal .................................................................. 11-19
System.................................................................. 7-19
Brake pedal
Free play............................................................. 11-19
Reserve distance.................................................. 11-19
Brake system............................................................. 7-19
Warning light.......................................................... 3-16
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Braking..................................................................... 7-19
Tips...................................................................... 7-19
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-20
Bulb
Chart.................................................................. 12-12
Replacing............................................................. 11-36
C
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-14
Light....................................................................... 6-3
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-16
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center
Console .................................................................. 6-6
Ventilators ............................................................... 4-4
Changing
Coolant................................................................ 11-11
Flat tire ................................................................... 9-6
Oil and oil filter ...................................................... 11-8
Charge warning light .................................................. 3-13
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light....................................................................... 3-12
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-19
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-19
Coolant level ........................................................ 11-11
Fluid level (automatic transmission fluid) .................. 11-14
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-17
Fluid level (power steering fluid).............................. 11-16
Fluid level (washer fluid) ........................................ 11-28
Oil level (engine oil) ................................................ 11-7
Oil level (front differential gear oil) .......................... 11-15
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-29
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-36
Installation with A/ELR seatbelt ................................ 1-32
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-37
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-40
Child safety ................................................................... 5
Locks.................................................................... 2-21
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-4
Light ..................................................................... 3-27
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-10
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels ................................................... 10-3
Interior .................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ...................................................... 4-10
Climate control system
Automatic ............................................................... 4-5
Clock ................................................................ 3-22, 3-24
Coat hook.................................................................. 6-12
Compass........................................................... 3-38, 3-41
Console ..................................................................... 6-6
Coolant ........................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Cooling system ........................................................ 11-10
Corrosion protection.................................................... 10-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-29
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22
Set indicator light.................................................... 3-22
Cup holder ................................................................. 6-8
Front passenger’s.................................................... 6-8
Index 14-3
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
14-4 Index
Second-row seat...................................................... 6-9
Third-row seat ......................................................... 6-9
D
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-29
Differential gear oil
Front ........................................................... 11-15, 12-6
Rear............................................................ 11-16, 12-6
Dimensions ............................................................... 12-2
Disarming the alarm system ........................................ 2-18
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-20
Dome light ........................................................ 6-2, 11-42
Door
Locks ..................................................................... 2-5
Open warning light ................................................. 3-17
Step light ............................................................. 11-43
Drive belts................................................................ 11-13
Driving
All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... 3-18
AWD vehicles .......................................................... 8-4
Car phone/cell phone .................................................. 8
Drinking ..................................................................... 7
Drugs ........................................................................ 7
Foreign countries ..................................................... 8-4
Pets .......................................................................... 8
Snowy and icy roads ................................................ 8-9
Tips.................................................................. 8-2, 8-4
Tired or sleepy............................................................ 7
Winter .................................................................... 8-8
E
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-7
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system... 3-16, 7-22
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-18
Engine
Compartment overview............................................ 11-6
Coolant ....................................................... 11-11, 12-7
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................. 6, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-4
Oil ................................................................ 11-7, 12-4
Overheating ........................................................... 9-14
Starting .................................................................. 7-7
Stopping................................................................. 7-8
Exterior care .............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires..................................................................... 9-6
Floor mat................................................................... 6-13
Fluid level
Automatic transmission ......................................... 11-14
Brake.................................................................. 11-17
Power steering ..................................................... 11-16
Fog light
Bulb.......................................................... 11-39, 12-12
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22
Switch................................................................... 3-32
Folding mirror switch................................................... 3-43
Front
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-15, 12-6
Fog light...................................................... 3-32, 11-39
Fog light indicator light ............................................ 3-22
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-27
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-39
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2
Active head restraint................................................. 1-6
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3
Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5
Lumbar support ....................................................... 1-7
Memory function ...................................................... 1-4
Power seat.............................................................. 1-3
Reclining................................................................. 1-3
Seat height adjustment ............................................. 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-2
Economy hints......................................................... 8-2
Filler lid and cap ...................................................... 7-3
Gauge .................................................................... 3-8
Requirements .................................................. 7-2, 12-3
Fuses ...................................................................... 11-34
Main fuse............................................................. 11-35
Fuses and circuits...................................................... 12-9
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .............................. 8-13
Glove box ................................................................... 6-6
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) .......................... 8-13
H
Hazard warning flasher ........................................... 3-5, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat ............................................................... 1-5
Second-row seat.................................................... 1-12
Third-row seat ....................................................... 1-16
Headlight
Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-30
Bulb replacement ................................................. 11-36
Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-12
Control switch ........................................................ 3-27
Flasher.................................................................. 3-28
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-22
HID headlights ......................................................... 11-36
High beam indicator light ............................................. 3-22
High/low beam change (dimmer) .................................. 3-28
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System ............................. 6-17
Hook
Coat ..................................................................... 6-12
Convenient tie-down ............................................... 6-16
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-13
Towing and tie-down ............................................... 9-15
Horn ......................................................................... 3-44
Hose and connections............................................... 11-10
I
Ignition switch ............................................................. 3-3
Light ...................................................................... 3-4
Illuminated entry......................................................... 2-10
Illumination brightness control ...................................... 3-29
Immobilizer ................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light (security indicator light)................. 2-4, 3-21
Indicator light
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-22
Cruise control set ................................................... 3-22
Front fog light......................................................... 3-22
Headlight............................................................... 3-22
Index 14-5
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
14-6 Index
High beam ............................................................ 3-22
Immobilizer............................................................ 3-21
Security .......................................................... 2-4, 3-21
Select lever/Gear position ....................................... 3-21
SPORT mode........................................................ 3-21
Traction control system OFF.................................... 3-19
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-21
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF ................................ 3-19
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation ................. 3-18, 3-19
Inside mirror .............................................................. 3-38
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
J
Jack and jack handle.................................................. 9-19
Jack-up point............................................................... 9-6
Jump starting............................................................. 9-11
K
Key ............................................................................ 2-2
Number .................................................................. 2-2
Reminder chime....................................................... 3-4
Replacement ........................................................... 2-4
Keyless entry system ................................................... 2-8
L
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light ..................................................... 11-41
Light
Back-up ............................................................... 11-39
Back-up (Station wagon)........................................ 11-40
Cargo area.................................................... 6-3, 11-44
Control switch ........................................................ 3-27
Dome............................................................ 6-2, 11-42
Door step ............................................................ 11-43
Front fog ..................................................... 3-32, 11-39
Front side marker ................................................... 3-28
Ignition switch ......................................................... 3-4
License plate ....................................................... 11-41
Map.............................................................. 6-3, 11-43
Rear combination ................................................. 11-39
Rear gate ............................................................... 6-3
Turn signal .................................................. 3-29, 11-39
Vanity mirror .................................................. 6-5, 11-43
Loading your vehicle................................................... 8-12
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-17
Low tire pressure warning light ..................................... 3-14
Lower and tether anchorage ........................................ 1-37
Lumbar support ........................................................... 1-7
M
Main fuse ................................................................ 11-35
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule ............................................................... 11-3
Seatbelt................................................................. 1-26
Tools..................................................................... 9-19
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-12
Manual
Transmission oil ..................................................... 12-6
Map light ........................................................... 6-3, 11-43
Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-21
Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-5
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Mirrors...................................................................... 3-38
Moonroof .................................................................. 2-25
Multi function display .................................................. 3-24
N
New vehicle break-in driving.......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer.................................................................... 3-6
Oil filter..................................................................... 11-8
Oil level
Engine.................................................................. 11-7
Front differential gear ............................................ 11-15
Rear differential gear ............................................. 11-16
Oil pressure warning light............................................ 3-13
On-road and off-road driving...................................... 9, 8-6
Outside
Mirror defogger ...................................................... 3-43
Mirrors.................................................................. 3-42
Temperature indicator ............................................. 3-23
Overhead console........................................................ 6-8
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-14
P
Parking
Brake ................................................................... 7-28
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-20
Light.................................................................... 11-38
Light switch ........................................................... 3-32
Tips...................................................................... 7-29
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel................................................................... 7-2
Power
Door locking switch.................................................. 2-7
Outlets .................................................................. 6-10
Outside mirrors ...................................................... 3-42
Seat....................................................................... 1-3
Steering ................................................................ 7-18
Steering fluid................................................ 11-16, 12-7
Windows ............................................................... 2-21
Precautions against vehicle modification................ 1-28, 1-72
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-7
Printed antenna........................................................... 5-2
R
Rear
Air conditioner......................................................... 4-9
Combination lights ................................................ 11-39
Differential gear oil........................................ 11-16, 12-6
Gate ............................................................. 2-24, 9-18
Gate light ...................................................... 6-3, 11-41
Turn signal light.................................................... 11-39
Rear differential
Oil temperature warning light ................................... 3-13
Rear Seat Entertainment ............................................. 5-29
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-21
Rear window
Defogger button ..................................................... 3-37
Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-35
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-31
Recommended
Automatic transmission fluid..................................... 12-7
Index 14-7
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
14-8 Index
Brake fluid............................................................. 12-7
Engine oil.............................................................. 12-4
Front differential gear oil ......................................... 12-6
Manual transmission oil .......................................... 12-6
Power steering fluid ................................................ 12-7
Rear differential gear oil.......................................... 12-6
Spark plugs........................................................... 12-7
Refueling .................................................................... 7-3
Remote engine start system .......................................... 7-8
Remote keyless entry system ........................................ 2-8
Replacement
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-19
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-29
Replacing
Air cleaner element ............................................... 11-12
Battery (remote keyless entry system) ...................... 2-11
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system)......... 2-12
Replacing bulbs .............................................. 11-36, 12-12
Back-up light (Station wagon) ................................. 11-40
Cargo area light.................................................... 11-44
Dome light ........................................................... 11-42
Door step light ...................................................... 11-43
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-39
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-39
Headlight ............................................................. 11-36
License plate light ................................................. 11-41
Map light.............................................................. 11-43
Parking light ......................................................... 11-38
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-39
Rear gate light...................................................... 11-41
Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-39
Vanity mirror light.................................................. 11-43
Rocking the vehicle .................................................... 8-11
Roof molding and crossbar .......................................... 8-17
Roof rail and crossbar ................................................. 8-14
S
Safety
Precautions when driving............................................. 5
Symbol...................................................................... 2
Warnings................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric ................................................................... 10-5
Front...................................................................... 1-2
Heater.................................................................... 1-7
Memory function...................................................... 1-4
Power .................................................................... 1-3
Second-row ............................................................ 1-8
Third-row............................................................... 1-13
Seatbelt................................................................. 5, 1-17
Fastening .............................................................. 1-18
Maintenance .......................................................... 1-26
Pretensioners......................................................... 1-27
Safety tips ............................................................. 1-17
Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-10
Second-row seats........................................................ 1-8
Armrest ................................................................. 1-13
Folding down ......................................................... 1-10
Forward and backward adjustment ............................ 1-8
Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-12
Reclining ................................................................ 1-9
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Security
Alarm system ........................................................ 2-16
ID plate................................................................... 2-3
Immobilizer.............................................................. 2-3
Indicator light................................................... 2-4, 3-21
Shock sensors....................................................... 2-20
Select lever ............................................................... 7-13
Position indicator ................................................... 3-21
Shift lock function................................................... 7-14
Shift lock release ................................................... 7-14
Shock sensors........................................................... 2-20
Shopping bag hook .................................................... 6-13
Snow tires........................................................ 8-10, 11-21
Snowy and icy roads .................................................... 8-9
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-11
Spare tire.................................................................... 9-2
Spark plugs...................................................... 11-13, 12-7
Specifications ............................................................ 12-2
Speedometer............................................................... 3-6
SPORT mode............................................................ 7-18
Indicator light......................................................... 3-21
SRS
Curtain airbag........................................................ 1-60
Frontal airbag ........................................................ 1-49
Side airbag ........................................................... 1-60
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ... 5, 1-45
SRS airbag system
Monitors................................................................ 1-71
Servicing............................................................... 1-72
Warning light ......................................................... 3-11
Starting the engine....................................................... 7-7
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-5
Steering wheel
Power ................................................................... 7-18
Tilt........................................................................ 3-44
Stopping the engine..................................................... 7-8
Storage compartment................................................... 6-6
Sun shade................................................................. 2-27
Sun visors .................................................................. 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-45
Synthetic leather upholstery ......................................... 10-5
T
Tachometer................................................................. 3-7
Temperature gauge...................................................... 3-8
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-13
Rear differential oil.................................................. 3-13
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-5
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-37, 1-40
Third-row seats .......................................................... 1-13
Access to the third-row seat..................................... 1-14
Folding down ......................................................... 1-15
Head restraint adjustment........................................ 1-16
Tie-down hooks.......................................................... 9-15
Tilt steering wheel....................................................... 3-44
Tire ................................................................. 11-21, 12-8
Chains .................................................................. 8-11
Inspection............................................................ 11-22
Pressures and wear.............................................. 11-23
Replacement........................................................ 11-26
Rotation .............................................................. 11-26
Index 14-9
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
14-10 Index
Size and pressure.................................................. 12-8
Types .................................................................. 11-21
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..... 7-27, 9-10, 11-21
Warning light ......................................................... 3-14
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-21
Tools ........................................................................ 9-19
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-37, 1-40
Towing...................................................................... 9-14
All wheels on the ground ........................................ 9-17
Flat-bed truck ........................................................ 9-17
Hooks................................................................... 9-15
Weight .................................................................. 8-21
Traction Control system
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-19
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-25
Trailer
Connecting............................................................ 8-19
Hitch ............................................................ 8-18, 8-24
Towing.................................................................. 8-21
Towing tips............................................................ 8-26
Trip meter ................................................................... 3-7
Turn signal
Indicator lights ....................................................... 3-21
Lever.................................................................... 3-29
U
Under-floor storage compartment ................................. 6-16
V
Valet mode................................................................ 2-18
Vanity mirror ...................................................... 6-5, 11-43
Vehicle
Capacity weight...................................................... 8-12
Identification ........................................................ 12-15
Symbols .................................................................... 3
Vehicle Dynamics Control
Operation indicator light................................... 3-18, 3-19
System.................................................................. 7-23
Warning light.................................................. 3-18, 3-19
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
W
Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 3-9
Warning chimes
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-10
Warning light
ABS.............................................................. 3-15, 7-21
All-Wheel Drive ...................................................... 3-18
AT OIL TEMP......................................................... 3-13
Brake system......................................................... 3-16
Charge.................................................................. 3-13
CHECK ENGINE.................................................... 3-12
Door open ............................................................. 3-17
Low fuel ................................................................ 3-17
Low tire pressure.................................................... 3-14
Oil pressure ........................................................... 3-13
Rear differential oil temperature................................ 3-13
Seatbelt......................................................... 1-18, 3-10
SRS airbag system................................................. 3-11
Vehicle Dynamics Control................................ 3-18, 3-19
Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-17
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 8/ 2
Warranties and maintenance ....................................... 8-21
Washing ................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing ................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators......................................................... 11-25
Wheel
Aluminum............................................................. 11-27
Balance ............................................................... 11-25
Nut tightening torque .............................................. 12-8
Replacement ........................................................ 11-27
Windows................................................................... 2-21
Windshield
Washer fluid ......................................................... 11-28
Wiper and washer switches..................................... 3-34
Wiper blades ........................................................ 11-30
Wiper deicer.......................................................... 3-36
Winter
Driving.................................................................... 8-8
Tires............................................................ 8-10, 11-21
Wiper and washer...................................................... 3-33
Wiper deicer.............................................................. 3-36
Index 14-11
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 4/ 6
Compass calibration zones
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A3170BE-A" EDITED: 2011/ 4/ 6
GAS STATION REFERENCE
&
Fuel
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI (90
RON) or higher.
& Fuel octane rating
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI). Refer to “Fuel octane rating” F7-2.
& Fuel capacity
16.9 US gal (64 liters, 14.1 Imp gal)
& Engine oil
Use only the following oils.
. API classification SM or SN with the words “ENERGY
CONSERVING” or “RESOURCE CONSERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5, which can be identified with the
ILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-4.
& Engine oil capacity
6.9 US qt (6.5 liters, 5.7 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using an oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-7.
& Cold tire pressure
Refer to “Tires” F12-8.
